JP2020028647A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of easily and reliably shooting a foul ball irrespective of being a low cost.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: a rotation operation unit; energization means that energizes the rotation operation unit toward the non-operation position; and an operation lever that can perform a first operation from a first position to a second position, from the outside. In the game machine, shooting means performs a shooting operation of the game ball with a shooting intensity according to a displacement amount in the rotation operation unit, the game ball shot in a state where the displacement amount is equal to or less than a foul threshold does not reach the game area, and the shooting operation by the shooting means is not executed when the first operation is performed on the operation lever. When a second operation from the second position to the first position is performed on the operation lever when the rotation operation unit is positioned at the non-operation position, according to the second operation, the rotation operation unit is displaced to the operation upper limit position side and the displacement amount is equal to or less than the foul threshold. While the second operation is performed on the operation lever, the rotation operation unit is held without returning to the non-operation position.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 16

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine includes a storage plate for storing game balls, and a launching means for firing game balls supplied from the storage plate toward a game area. Further, when the game is ended with the game balls remaining in the storage plate, the player can pull out the game balls in the storage plate by operating a ball release lever or the like.
However, even if the ball removing operation is performed, not all game balls can be necessarily removed, and a small amount of game balls often remain on the upstream side of the firing means. The rest of the game balls can only be picked up lightly by the firing means and collected as foul balls, but the operation of the firing handle in such a case is difficult to adjust, and the ball may be accidentally driven into the game area.
Therefore, in order to be able to easily and reliably launch a foul ball, for example, Patent Document 1 proposes a gaming machine provided with a foul ball launch switch.

JP-A-63-188078

In the case of the invention described in Patent Literature 1, it is necessary to newly provide a circuit for hitting a foul ball, a connection wiring, and the like in addition to the foul ball hitting switch.
The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of easily and reliably hitting a foul ball despite low cost.

The present invention provides a launching means for firing a game ball toward a game area, a return path for returning the game ball when the game ball fired by the firing means does not reach the game area, A first operation means which can be changed between a non-operation position and an operation upper limit position by the operation of; an urging means for urging the first operation means toward the non-operation position; A second operating means capable of performing the firing operation of the game ball at a firing intensity corresponding to a displacement amount from the non-operating position in the first operating means, and the displacement amount is specified. A game ball fired in a state equal to or less than a threshold does not reach the game area, and a game ball fired in a state in which the displacement exceeds the specific threshold reaches the game area, and the second operation means When the first operation is performed, A second operation different from the first operation is performed on the second operation means when the first operation means is in the non-operation position. The first operation means is displaced to the operation upper limit position side with the second operation when the second operation is performed, and the amount of displacement is equal to or less than the specific threshold value. While the second operation is being performed, the first operation means is held without returning to the non-operation position.
Further, in a state where the first operation means is at the non-operation position, the first operation on the second operation means may be prohibited, and the second operation may be allowed.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, it becomes possible to strike a foul ball easily and reliably despite low cost.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a side view of the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of an outer frame and a front frame in the pachinko machine. It is a partial front view of the front frame in the pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of the front door in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the front door in the pachinko machine. It is a plane sectional view of the front door in the pachinko machine. It is principal part sectional drawing of the front door in the pachinko machine. It is principal part front sectional drawing of the front door in the pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective view of the ball feed unit in the pachinko machine. It is the principal part side sectional drawing of the pachinko machine, (a) has shown the state in which the ball feeding part went up, and (b) has shown the state in which the ball feeding part went down. It is a partially broken plan view of the firing handle in the pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective view of the firing handle in the pachinko machine. It is a front sectional view of the firing handle in the pachinko machine. It is an explanatory view of the firing operation in the pachinko machine, (a) is a relationship between the operation amount of the rotation operation unit and the emission intensity, (b) is the operation of the rotation operation unit and the operation lever when the rotation operation unit is operated, (C) Operation of the rotation operation unit and the operation lever when the operation of the rotation operation unit is stopped and returned to the non-operation state, and (d) Rotation operation when the operation lever is operated from the second position to the first position. 2 shows the operation of the unit and the operation lever. It is an exploded perspective view of the front door in the pachinko machine. It is the front view of the state where the 2nd upper unit was removed from the front door in the pachinko machine. It is principal part sectional drawing of the front door in the pachinko machine. It is a principal part front view of the front door in the pachinko machine. It is principal part front sectional drawing of the front door in the pachinko machine. It is principal part sectional drawing of the front door in the pachinko machine. It is principal part front sectional drawing of the front door in the pachinko machine. It is principal part side sectional drawing of the front door in the pachinko machine. It is principal part sectional drawing of the front door in the pachinko machine. It is a front view of the 2nd upper unit in the pachinko machine. It is a side view of the 2nd upper unit in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the 2nd upper unit in the pachinko machine. It is a disassembled perspective view of the frame movable production means in the pachinko machine. It is side surface sectional drawing of the movable part which comprises the frame movable presentation means in the pachinko machine. It is an axial sectional view of the movable part which comprises the frame movable production means in the pachinko machine. It is a side sectional view of the frame movable production means in the pachinko machine. It is a disassembled perspective view of the drive mechanism which comprises the frame movable production means in the pachinko machine. It is a top view at the origin drive position of the drive mechanism which comprises the frame movable production means in the pachinko machine. It is a top view at the forward drive position of the drive mechanism which comprises the frame movable presentation means in the pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing of the rotation operation of the frame movable body in the pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective view of the operation effecting means in the pachinko machine. It is a side sectional view in the origin position of the operation production means in the pachinko machine. It is a side sectional view in the front end position of operation production means in the pachinko machine. It is a side sectional view in the origin position of the slide support means which constitutes the operation effect means in the pachinko machine. It is a side sectional view in the front end position of slide support means which constitutes operation production means in the pachinko machine. It is a principal part side sectional view in the pushing position of the operation production means in the pachinko machine. It is the plane sectional view (a) and side sectional view (b) of the 2nd positioning means of the 2nd upper unit in the pachinko machine. It is a side sectional view of the 1st locking means of the 2nd upper unit in the pachinko machine. It is the side sectional view (a) and plane sectional view (b) of the 3rd locking means of the 2nd upper unit in the pachinko machine. It is the side sectional view (a) and back view (b) of the 2nd locking means of the 2nd upper unit in the pachinko machine. It is a side sectional view of the 2nd, 3rd fixing means of the 2nd upper unit in the pachinko machine. It is plane sectional drawing of the 2nd fixing means of the 2nd upper unit in the same pachinko machine, (a) shows the state which does not tighten a fixing screw, (b) has shown the state which tightened the fixing screw. It is a principal part rear view of the front door in the pachinko machine. It is principal part sectional drawing of the front frame tail and the front door in the pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game board in the same pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of a base plate, a rail member, and an upper component of a game board in the pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game information display means in the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a liquid crystal display means, a board movable production means, a back mounted base, and a ball collecting case in the pachinko machine. It is principal part sectional drawing of the game board in the same pachinko machine. It is a side sectional view of the lower part of the game board in the pachinko machine. It is a side sectional view of the upper part of the game board in the pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective view of a board movable body and a board movable body base which constitute a board movable production means in the pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of an elevating drive unit that constitutes a board movable effect means in the pachinko machine. It is a front view of the raising / lowering drive unit which comprises the board movable production means in the pachinko machine, (a) has shown the state which removed the guide member, the base cover, etc., and (b) has shown the state which removed the guide member. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the operation | movement of a board movable body, and a frame movable body in the pachinko machine. It is a block diagram of a control system in the pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a connection relationship between an LED common port and an LED data port, game information display means, and performance information display means (setting display means, performance display means) in the pachinko machine. It is a figure showing the flow chart (the first half) of the power-on processing in the pachinko machine. It is a figure showing the flow chart (the latter half) of the power-on processing in the pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a source program corresponding to a part of a power-on process in the pachinko machine and a processing order for each processing mode. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a source program corresponding to a part of a power-on process in the pachinko machine and a processing order for each processing mode. It is a figure showing the correspondence of the 0th to 7th bits of input port 1 and the input signal in the pachinko machine. It is a figure showing the correspondence of the input information of the setting change operation means, the door, and the game information clear means and the value of the A register in the pachinko machine, and the correspondence between them and the transition branch destination. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the setting change processing in the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the source program (a) of a system input / output management process in the pachinko machine, flowchart (b), and the correspondence (c) of LED output counter and the display state of a setting display means. It is a figure showing the 7-segment decoding table for numerical values in the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the source program (a) and the flowchart (b) of the process during a system check in the pachinko machine. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the power failure check processing in the pachinko machine. It is a figure showing a flowchart of RAM clear processing in the pachinko machine. It is a figure showing a flow chart of common processing in the pachinko machine. It is a figure showing a flow chart of power supply re-waiting processing in the pachinko machine. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the setting check processing in the pachinko machine. It is a figure showing a flow chart of processing outside a field in the pachinko machine. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the RAM check processing outside the field in the pachinko machine. It is a figure showing an addition / non-addition period of each counter in the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the minimum value and the maximum value of the specific lapse time for every winning opening means and the out port in the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the start prize timing and the passage timing of an out ball detection means in the pachinko machine, (a) shows the case of the last change of the addition period, (b) shows the case of the last change of the non-addition period I have. It is a figure which shows the entrance timing with respect to various prize means etc., and the passage timing of an out ball detection means when the effect symbol fluctuates with the SP reach 1 big hit variation pattern during the normal gaming state (addition period) in the pachinko machine. . It is a figure which shows the ball entry timing with respect to various prize means etc., and the passage timing of an out ball detection means when the effect symbol fluctuates with the SP reach 2 big hit variation pattern during the normal gaming state (addition period) in the pachinko machine. . It is a figure which shows the entry timing with respect to various prize means etc., and the passage timing of an out ball detection means when the effect symbol fluctuates in the normal one variation pattern during the time saving state (non-addition period) in the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the entrance timing with respect to various prize means etc., and the passage timing of an out ball detection means when the effect symbol fluctuates in the normal non-addition 2 fluctuation pattern during the time saving state (non-addition period) in the pachinko machine. It is the figure which showed the main transmission command with respect to the production control board from the main control board in the power-on process of the pachinko machine for every processing mode. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the timer interruption processing in the pachinko machine. It is a figure showing a flow chart of LED management processing in the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the LED common output selection table (a) and the LED data output information table (b) in the pachinko machine. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the performance display update processing in the pachinko machine. It is a figure showing a flow chart of display update processing (the first half) in the pachinko machine. It is a figure showing the flowchart of the display update processing (the latter half: when the lighting / light-out switching counter is an even number) in the pachinko machine. It is a figure showing the flowchart of the display update processing (the latter half: when the lighting / light-out switching counter is an odd number) in the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the identification display part LED data table (a) and the decimal value LED data table (b) in the pachinko machine. It is a figure showing a display mode of an identification display part and a numerical value display part corresponding to a display contents pointer and a section pointer in the pachinko machine. 6 is a time chart showing a display mode of the performance display means of the performance display means in the pachinko machine and a change state of each value of a blink cycle timer, an operation check timer, a lighting / light-off switching counter, and a display content pointer. In the pachinko machine, the display mode of the performance display means from the real-time base value display period to the first cumulative base value display period (pre-measurement period), a blink cycle timer, an operation check timer, a lighting / light-off switching counter, and a display content pointer It is a time chart which shows a change state with a value. The display form of the performance display means of the pachinko machine from the first cumulative base value display period to the second cumulative base value display period (second unit measurement period), a blinking cycle timer, an operation check timer, a lighting / light-off switching counter, a display It is a time chart which shows the change state with each value of a content pointer. It is a figure which shows the operation | movement content of the production | presentation means at the time of a command reception at the time of RAM clear and setting change of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the operation | movement content of the production | presentation means at the time of command recovery at the time of a backup recovery of a pachinko machine, a setting confirmation, and RAM abnormality. It is explanatory drawing which shows one scene of the effect by the frame movable body, board movable body, and operation handle of the pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows one scene of the effect by the frame movable body, board movable body, and operation handle of the pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows one scene of the effect by the frame movable body, board movable body, and operation handle of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the display pattern of a base value in the said pachinko machine, and error notification in case of a door opening error. It is the schematic front view (a) and side view (b) of the pachinko machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is the schematic front view (a) and side view (b) of the pachinko machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing the relation between the display pattern of the base value and the length of the big hit start / end interval in the pachinko machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is a front sectional view of the back of the game board in the pachinko machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. It is a plane sectional view of the back of a game board in the pachinko machine.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIGS. 1 to 106 illustrate a first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine. 1 to 8, the gaming machine main body 1 includes an outer frame 2, a front frame 3 arranged on the front side of the outer frame 2, and a front door 4 arranged on the front side of the front frame 3. I have.

  As shown in FIGS. 2 to 4, the outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular shape by a pair of left and right vertical frame members 5 and 6 and a pair of upper and lower horizontal frame members 7 and 8. A front cover member 9 is mounted on the front side of the lower horizontal frame member 8 so as to connect the left and right vertical frame members 5 and 6, and the front frame 3 is disposed above the front cover member 9. I have.

  As shown in FIG. 4 and the like, the front frame 3 is provided on the upper side of the front cover member 9 with a rectangular frame portion 10 which can be substantially contacted with the front edge side of the outer frame 2. The game board mounting portion 11 and the lower mounting portion 12 provided on the lower side in the frame portion 10 are integrally provided, for example, via a first hinge 13 disposed on one side in the left-right direction, for example, on the left side. It is pivotally attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable and detachable, and can be locked in a closed state with respect to the outer frame 2 by a locking means 14 on the opposite side of the first hinge 13 in the left-right direction, for example, the right end side. A game board 15 is detachably mounted on the game board mounting section 11 from, for example, a front side, and a firing means 16 is disposed on the lower mounting section 12 at, for example, substantially the center of the front side, for example, in the left-right direction, and a lower speaker 17 is disposed on the right side thereof. Have been.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the launching means 16 includes, for example, a launch rail 18 that is arranged in an inclined shape ascending left and a launch ball stopper 19 that supports a game ball supplied on the launch rail 18 at a launch standby position. A hammer 20 that is arranged corresponding to a firing standby position on the firing rail 18 and that can swing around a drive shaft 20a in the front-rear direction, a rotary solenoid that swings and drives the hammer 20 via the drive shaft 20a, and the like. When the firing handle 22 described later is rotated, the hammer 20 is continuously driven in the hitting direction (clockwise) by the firing drive means 21 at a firing intensity corresponding to the operation amount. It is designed to be driven. Thereby, the game balls supplied one by one onto the firing rail 18 are sequentially fired along the firing rail 18 toward the game area 15a of the game board 15. A firing base plate 23 made of sheet metal is mounted on the front side of the lower mounting portion 12, and the firing rail 18, the firing ball stopper 19, and the hammer 20 are respectively disposed on the front side of the firing base plate 23, and the firing drive is performed. The means 21 is arranged on the rear side of the firing base plate 23.

  As shown in FIGS. 6 to 8 and the like, the front door 4 is formed in a rectangular shape corresponding to the front surface of the front frame 3 and has a window base 24 a made of a synthetic resin having a window hole 24 a of the viewing window 24 at substantially the center. And is pivotally connected to the front frame 3 via the same second hinge 26 as the first hinge 13, for example, on the left end side so as to be openable and closable and detachable, and is closed with respect to the front frame 3 by the locking means 14. It can be locked in the state.

  The door base 25 includes an upper base 27 in the left-right direction disposed above the window hole 24a, a pair of vertical base portions 28a, 28b disposed on both left and right sides of the window hole 24a, and a lower side of the window hole 24a. The lower base portion 29 is arranged, for example, integrally with the disposed lower base portion 29 in the left-right direction. The lower base portion 29 is formed in a vertically wide shape corresponding to the front side of the lower mounting portion 12 of the front frame 3. For example, a pair of upper speakers 30a and 30b are arranged around the left and right ends of the upper base portion 27, and a pair of intermediate speakers 31a and 31b are arranged at the lower ends of the left and right vertical base portions 28a and 28b. ing.

  On the rear side of the door base 25, a horizontal reinforcing member 32 in the left-right direction is provided on the upper end side of the upper base portion 27, and vertical reinforcing members 33a, 33b in the vertical direction are provided outside the left and right vertical base portions 28a, 28b. The lower reinforcing members 34 are mounted on the base portions 29, respectively. The lower reinforcing member 34 has a wide shape corresponding to substantially the entire lower base portion 29, and lower end sides of the vertical reinforcing members 33a and 33b are connected to each other by screws or the like at the left and right end portions, and are connected rearward to the upper edge side. A bending receiving frame 34a is provided. The reinforcing members 32, 33a, 33b, 34 are made of sheet metal.

  The inner peripheral side of the joint between the upper base 27 of the door base 25 and the left and right vertical bases 28a and 28b and the joint of the lower base 29 and the left and right vertical bases 28a and 28b correspond to the window hole 24a. The upper speakers 30a and 30b and the intermediate speakers 31a and 31b are respectively mounted to the joints of the upper and lower speakers 30a and 30b through speaker mounting portions.

  The window hole 24a is provided corresponding to the front side of the game area 15a, and is closed by a transparent plate unit 35 detachably mounted on the back side of the door base 25. As shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. 7, the transparent plate unit 35 includes two front and rear transparent plates 36a through which the game area 15a can be seen, and a connection frame 36b that connects the two front and rear transparent plates 36a on the outer peripheral side. Are mounted on the receiving frame 34a via the engagement means 37 (see FIG. 6), and the upper side is detachably fixed to the back side of the door base 25 by a plurality of fixing means 39. Although it is desirable to use a glass plate for the transparent plate 36a, a synthetic resin plate or the like may be used.

  A lower unit 41 is provided on the front side of the lower base portion 29, and an upper unit 42 is provided on the front side of the upper base portion 27 and the vertical base portions 28a and 28b. The upper unit 42 is divided into two, for example, a first upper unit 42a on the left and a second upper unit 42b on the right.

  As shown in FIG. 1, FIG. 6, FIG. 8 to FIG. 10, etc., the lower unit 41 has, for example, a push-button effect operation means 43 operable by a player, and an upper plate for storing game balls for firing. 44, a lower plate 45 for storing surplus balls, a launch ball guide passage 46 for guiding game balls in the upper plate 44 to the launch unit 16, a ball release operation unit 47 operable by a player, and a ball release operation When the means 47 is operated, the ball removal guide passage 48 for guiding the game ball on the upper plate 44 side to the lower plate 45 side, the upper plate 44, the lower plate 45, the launch ball guide passage 46, the ball removal guide passage 48, etc. From the front side.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the upper plate 44 is connected to one of the left and right sides, for example, the right side of the storage portion 51, which extends from the back wall 50 integrated with the door base 25 to the front side. An alignment portion 52 is provided on a plate member 53 mounted on the front side of the back wall 50. The back wall 50 is provided with a payout port 50a on the opposite side of the storage section 51 from the alignment section 52, for example, on the left side, and prize balls and the like are paid out from the payout port 50a to the storage section 51.

  The storage portion 51 is gradually narrowed toward the alignment portion 52, and the bottom surface thereof is formed with a gentle slope having a low alignment portion 52 side. To guide you. The alignment portion 52 is formed in a groove shape having a width that allows game balls to be aligned in a line, and is formed with a gentle slope at the downstream side, and the downstream end side is bent into, for example, a U-shape, and the firing ball guide passage 46 is formed. Is connected to the upstream end side.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 to 10, the launching ball guide passage 46 is arranged, for example, in a downwardly inclined shape along the front side of the back wall 50, and the downstream end side (the left end side) is located at the lower base portion 29. And it is connected to a launching ball supply hole 54 penetrating the lower reinforcing member 34 back and forth. In addition, a passage opening 55 is formed in the lower base portion 29 and the lower reinforcing member 34 on the rear side thereof so as to correspond to the rear side of the shooting ball guide passage 46. The passage opening 55 is used for maintenance, and is closed by an opening / closing lid 56 so as to be openable and closable. The passage opening 55 is formed integrally with the launching ball supply hole 54, for example, on the upstream side of the launching ball supply hole 54.

  In the bottom wall 46a of the launch ball guide passage 46, for example, a ball removal hole 57 is formed near the upstream side of the launch ball supply hole 54, and the ball removal guide passage 48 communicates with the lower side of the ball removal hole 57. are doing. The ball-pulling guide passage 48 has its downstream end opening toward the lower plate 45, and guides game balls that have fallen into the ball-pulling holes 57 to the lower plate 45.

  Further, for example, below the launching ball guide passage 46, there is disposed a ball opening / closing means 58 capable of opening and closing the ball emptying hole 57 in conjunction with the ball emptying operation means 47. The ball opening / closing means 58 is supported slidably in the left-right direction along, for example, the bottom wall 46a of the launching ball guide passage 46, so that the opening / closing portion 58a protrudes toward the ball drawing hole 57 and closes the ball drawing hole 57. The opening / closing portion 58a can be changed between a closed state (shown by a solid line in FIG. 10) and an open state (shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 10) in which the opening / closing portion 58a opens the ball hole 57. It is biased to the closed state side.

  Further, the ball-pulling operation means 47 is supported so as to be vertically movable while projecting upward, for example, from the decorative cover 49. Is linked by a linking mechanism 59 composed of a swing arm or the like. When the ball-pulling operation means 47 moves downward from the non-operation position to the operation position by the pressing operation of the player operation, the ball-pulling opening / closing means 58 moves from the closed state via the interlocking mechanism 59 against the urging force of the urging means. The state shifts to the open state, and the ball hole 57 is opened. Thereby, the game balls on the upstream side of the ball removing hole 57 sequentially fall into the ball removing hole 57 and are guided to the lower plate 45 by the ball removing guide passage 48.

  When the player who has pressed the ball-pulling operation means 47 stops pressing the ball-pulling operation means 47, the ball-pulling opening / closing means 58 is returned from the open state to the closed state by the urging force of the urging means, and the ball-pulling hole 57 is closed. At the same time, the ball removing operation means 47 returns to the non-operation position via the interlocking mechanism 59. When the ball ejection hole 57 is closed, the game balls flowing down in the shot ball guide passage 46 are guided to the shot ball supply hole 54 without falling into the ball ejection hole 57.

  On the back side of the lower reinforcing member 34, a ball feed unit 61 and a lower plate guide unit 62 are detachably mounted as shown in FIGS. The ball feed unit 61 is for supplying game balls guided from the upper plate 44 through the launching ball guide passage 46 to the launching means 16, and behind the launching ball supply hole 54 and of the launching means 16. It is located on the front side. The ball feed unit 61 is provided with, for example, an opening / closing lid 56 on the front side thereof, and is opened to a normal position where the opening / closing lid 56 closes the passage opening 55 by a left / right hinge 63 provided on the lower side. It is rotatably supported between an open position and held at a normal position by holding means 64.

  As shown in FIGS. 9, 11, 12, etc., the ball feeding unit 61 includes a front and rear flat ball feeding case 65 disposed along the rear side of the lower reinforcing member 34, and a ball feeding case 65 inside the ball feeding case 65. A ball feeding member 66 provided to be able to swing freely, and a ball feeding driving means 67 such as an electromagnetic solenoid for driving the ball feeding member 66 in the ball feeding case 65, in synchronization with the firing operation of the firing means 16. The game balls are fed one by one onto the firing rail 18 one by one.

  The ball feeding case 65 is provided at a lower position than the ball receiving port 68 and opens to the rear side corresponding to the launching ball supply hole 54. A ball feed port 69 is provided at the front and rear, and a pivot 63a of a hinge 63 is provided at a lower side. The ball feed member 66 has a front-rear support shaft 70 at one end thereof and a ball feed portion 71 at the other end thereof. The ball feed drive means 67 drives the ball feed case 65 around the support shaft 70 with respect to the ball feed case 65. By swinging, the ball feeding section 71 moves up and down.

  The ball feeding section 71 has a blocking section 71a and a ball receiving section 71b provided at the top and bottom with a gap of about one game ball, and when the ball is raised, the blocking section 71a is placed on the ball receiving section 71a as shown in FIG. The ball receiving portion 71b retreats to the upper side of the entrance 68 and receives and holds one game ball. When the ball descends, the blocking portion 71a prevents the subsequent game ball from entering as shown in FIG. The game balls held on the portion 71b are caused to flow down from the ball feed port 69 onto the firing rail 18.

  In the case of the present embodiment, since there is a slight distance between the ball emptying hole 57 and the ball feeding unit 61 on the downstream side, the firing by the firing means 16 is performed in a state where the game ball remains in the upper plate 44. Even if the operation is stopped and the ball-pulling operation means 47 is operated, all the game balls cannot be pulled out, and as shown in FIG. 9, several balls (two in this case) are provided upstream of the ball feed unit 61. Game balls will remain. In order for the player to collect these remaining balls, it is necessary to intentionally make the ball into a foul ball by operating the firing means 16 with a firing intensity that does not reach the game area 15a.

  The lower plate guide unit 62 guides the surplus balls when the upper plate 44 is full and the foul balls returned without reaching the game area 15a despite being fired by the firing means 16 to the lower plate 45. A surplus ball receiving portion 72 for receiving extra balls upstream of the payout opening 50a, a foul ball receiving portion 74 for receiving foul balls flowing backward through the launching ball guide passage 73 of the game board 15, and an extra ball A lower plate guide passage (return passage) 75 for guiding the surplus balls received by the receiving portion 72 and the foul balls received by the foul ball receiving portion 74 to the lower plate 45 is provided.

  The firing handle 22 has a firing handle base 81 projecting substantially forward from the decorative cover 49 as shown in FIGS. 1, 2, 13 to 15, and the like. (First operating means) 82 rotatably supported on the rotary operating part, a return spring (biasing means) 83 for urging the rotary operating part 82 in the counter-operation direction, and a handle for covering the front side of the rotary operating part 82 A cap 84 and the like are provided.

  The firing handle base 81 is made of, for example, a synthetic resin, and has a substantially cylindrical support leg 85 arranged in the front-rear direction, and a bowl-shaped mechanism housing portion 86 provided on the front end side of the support leg 85. The rear end side of the support leg 85 is fixed to the door base 25, the lower reinforcing member 34, and the like.

  In the mechanism accommodating portion 86, a bearing portion 87 substantially in the front-rear direction is provided at a central portion, and a cylindrical portion 88 having a forwardly projecting shape is provided integrally with the firing handle base 81 at a plurality of peripheral portions. A housing 89, a touch sensor 90, an operation switch 91, an operation lever (second operation means) 92, and the like are housed therein.

  The variable resistor 89 is for detecting a rotation angle (operation amount) of the rotation operation unit 82, and a detection gear 93 is mounted on a detection shaft 89a protruding forward. The touch sensor 90 is for detecting contact of a finger or the like with the rotary operation unit 82, and is disposed, for example, on the rear side of the bearing unit 87.

  The operation lever 92 performs a firing stop operation for stopping the firing operation by the firing means 16 and a foul ball firing operation for intentionally firing a foul ball by the firing means 16. In a state in which 92a protrudes outward from a predetermined portion on the outer peripheral side of the mechanism housing portion 86, for example, a cutout portion 86a provided in the lower left portion, around the rotation shaft 94 in the front-rear direction with respect to the firing handle base 81 at the other end side. It is swingably supported. The operation lever 92 has, for example, a first position (shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 15A) where the protrusion amount of the operation unit 92a is large and a second position (shown by a solid line in FIG. 15A) where the protrusion amount is small. And is urged toward the first position, and when in the first position, the operation switch 91 is turned on to allow the firing operation by the firing means 16 and is in the second position. Occasionally, the operation switch 91 is turned off and the firing operation by the firing means 16 is stopped.

  The operation lever 92 is provided with a second engagement portion 96 that can engage with the first engagement portion 95 on the rotation operation portion 82 side. The second engagement portion 96 is arranged at a position where it moves in the rotation direction of the rotation operation portion 82 in accordance with the swing of the operation lever 92, and is formed, for example, in a forward projection shape.

  The rotation operation section 82 is made of, for example, synthetic resin, and has an operation ring section 101 formed in a short cylindrical shape corresponding to the front edge side of the mechanism accommodating section 86, and a plurality of protrusions provided on the outer peripheral side of the operation ring section 101. For example, three finger hooks 102, a substantially front-rear direction operation shaft 103 disposed at the center of the operation ring portion 101, a connecting plate 104 connecting the inner peripheral side of the operation ring portion 101 and the outer peripheral side of the operation shaft 103, The operating shaft 103 is rotatably supported by the firing handle base 81 by inserting the rear end side of the operating shaft 103 into the bearing 87.

  An operation side gear 105 is mounted on the operation shaft 103 of the rotation operation unit 82 so as to be integrally rotatable. The operation side gear 105 is engaged with the detection side gear 93. As a result, the rotation operation unit 82 and the detection shaft 89a of the variable resistor 89 are linked, and the rotation angle (displacement amount) of the rotation operation unit 82 can be detected by the variable resistor 89. In addition, the rotation operation section 82 is configured to function as an electrode of the touch sensor 90 by, for example, applying plating to the entire outer surface thereof.

  For example, a plurality of arc-shaped guide holes 104a are provided in the connecting plate 104 of the rotary operation portion 82, and the tubular portion 88 on the firing handle base 81 side is inserted forward through the guide holes 104a. Thus, the operable range of the rotation operation unit (first operation means) 82 is restricted between a predetermined non-operation position and an operation upper limit position clockwise rotated from the non-operation position by a predetermined angle.

  Further, the rotation operation section 82 is urged toward a non-operation position by a return spring (urging means) 83. The return spring 83 is attached to the operation shaft 103 of the rotation operation unit 82 from the front side, and one end of the return spring 83 is engaged with the engagement unit 106 of the rotation operation unit 82, and the other end is engaged with the engagement unit 107 of the firing handle base 81. Therefore, the rotation operation unit 82 is urged in the counter operation direction (counterclockwise), and the rotation operation unit 82 and the touch sensor 90 are electrically connected.

  Further, a first engagement portion 95 is integrally provided on the rotation operation portion 82, for example, on the back side of the connection plate 104. The first engagement portion 95 is, for example, a ridge in the radial direction. When the rotation operation portion 82 returns to the non-operation position side by the return spring 83, the first engagement portion 95 is at a specific position before the non-operation position by a predetermined angle. The second engaging portion 96 of the operating lever 92 at the position is engaged. Since the urging force of the return spring 83 on the rotary operation unit 82 side is larger than the urging force on the operation lever 92 side, the second engagement is performed while the rotary operation unit 82 further moves from the specific position to the non-operation position. When the operation portion 92 is pushed by the first engagement portion 95 and the operation lever 92 moves to the second position side, and the rotation operation portion 82 reaches the non-operation position, the operation lever 92 reaches the second position. ing. That is, when the rotation operation section 82 is at the non-operation position, the operation lever 92 is held at the second position.

  The handle cap 84 is formed in a substantially hemispherical shape with a synthetic resin, and has a plurality of fixed bases 108 projecting rearward on the inner surface thereof corresponding to the cylindrical portion 88 on the firing handle base 81 side. Is fitted to the inner peripheral side of the operation ring portion 101 from the front side, and the fixing base 108 is screwed from the rear side of the firing handle base 81 via the cylindrical portion 88 to be detachably attached to the firing handle base 81. Fixed. At least a part of the handle cap 84 constitutes a light-emitting lens portion, and an LED board 109 is disposed inside the handle cap 84.

  As shown in FIGS. 16A and 16B, when the player grips the rotation operation unit 82 and rotates it clockwise, the operation lever 92 moves from the second position to the first position side. As a result, the operation switch 91 is turned ON, and the firing operation by the firing means 16 is permitted. Thereafter, the firing operation by the firing means 16 is performed at a firing intensity corresponding to the operation amount (displacement amount) of the rotary operation unit 82. At this time, the game ball fired by the firing means 16 does not reach the game area 15a when the operation amount of the rotation operation unit 82 is equal to or less than a predetermined foul threshold (specific threshold), and the rotation operation amount of the rotation operation unit 82 Reaches the game area 15a (passes through the return prevention valve 337 described later) when exceeds the foul threshold (FIG. 16A). When the player presses the operation lever 92 from the first position to the second position (first operation) in this state, the operation switch 91 is turned off, and the firing operation by the firing means 16 is stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 16 (c), when the player stops operating the rotation operation unit 82 to stop the firing operation and returns the rotation operation unit 82 to the non-operation position, the operation lever 92 is accordingly moved to the first position. To the second position. As a result, the operation switch 91 is turned off, and the firing operation by the firing means 16 is stopped. When the rotation operation unit 82 is at the non-operation position, the operation lever 92 is held at the second position, and the player can perform an operation toward the first position (second operation).

  As described above, when the rotation operation portion 82 returns to the non-operation position, the first engagement portion 95 contacts the second engagement portion 96, and the operation lever 92 moves from the first position to the second position. When the rotation operation portion 82 reaches the non-operation position, for example, an impact due to a collision between the guide hole 104 a on the rotation operation portion 82 side and the cylindrical portion 88 on the firing handle base 81 side is reduced by the urging force of the operation lever 92. . When the rotary operation portion 82 is in the non-operation position, the guide hole 104a on the rotary operation portion 82 does not abut on the cylindrical portion 88 on the firing handle base 81 side, and the first engagement portion 95 and the second The rotation operation section 82 may be held at the non-operation position by engagement with the engagement section 96.

  FIG. 16C shows an example in which the operation lever 92 is returned to the non-operation position in a state where the operation lever 92 is not pressed (is in the first position). It is of course possible to return the rotary operation unit 82 to the non-operation position in the state where the rotation operation unit 82 has been operated (it is in the second position). In this case, since the operation lever 92 is held at the second position in advance, the first engagement portion 95 comes into contact with the second engagement portion 96 when the rotation operation portion 82 reaches the non-operation position. Also in this case, when the rotary operation portion 82 is in the non-operation position, the guide hole 104a on the rotary operation portion 82 does not abut on the cylindrical portion 88 on the firing handle base 81 side, and the first engagement portion 95 The rotation operation section 82 may be held at the non-operation position by the engagement between the rotation operation section 82 and the second engagement section 96.

  As shown in FIG. 16D, in a state where the rotation operation unit 82 is in the non-operation position, the player operates the operation lever 92 instead of the rotation operation unit 82 from the second position to the first position (second operation). Then, the second engagement portion 96 on the operation lever 92 pushes and moves the first engagement portion 95 on the rotation operation portion 82, whereby the rotation operation portion 82 reaches a specific position against the urging force of the return spring 83. Moving. At this time, since the rotation amount (displacement amount) of the rotation operation unit 82 is set to be equal to or less than the Foul threshold value (FIG. 16A), the player touches the rotation operation unit 82 in that state and fires. When the means 16 is operated, the launched game ball becomes a foul ball without reaching the game area 15a.

  Therefore, after the player operates the ball removing operation means 47 to extract the game balls of the upper plate 44 to the lower plate 45 side, it is also desired to collect all the several game balls remaining on the upstream side of the ball feed unit 61. In this case, if the firing means 16 is operated in a state where the operation lever 92 is operated and held at the first position, the remaining game balls can be easily and reliably collected as foul balls. Note that, while the player operates the operation lever 92 from the second position to the first position (second operation), and while maintaining that state, the rotation operation unit 82 is held at the specific position and returns to the non-operation position. Never.

  As shown in FIGS. 17, 18 and the like, a pair of left and right speaker mounting projections 111a and 111b projecting forward from the door base 25 are integrally formed on the upper portion of the door base 25. As shown in FIGS. 19 to 22, the speaker mounting projections 111a and 111b have a substantially square shape in front view with openings 112 and 113 formed on both front and rear sides. Speakers 30a and 30b are detachably inserted and accommodated.

  As shown in FIG. 20, receiving portions 114b and 114c for the first and second upper units 42a and 42b are provided on the speaker mounting protrusion 111a. That is, receiving portions 114b and 114c for the first and second upper units 42a and 42b are provided on the left and right sides of the flat portion 114a on the speaker mounting protrusion 111a on the hinges 13 and 26, respectively. The upper surface of each of the upper units 42a and 42b is substantially flush with the flat portion 114a. A receiving portion 114d for the second upper unit 42b is provided above the speaker mounting protrusion 111b opposite to the hinges 13 and 26, as shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 22, the upper speakers 30a and 30b include a magnet 116, a coil bobbin 117, a voice coil 118, a diaphragm 119, a center cap 120, and the like in a speaker frame 115. A front cover 121 is provided on the front side of the speaker frame 115. It is installed. The front cover 121 is fitted into the front opening 112 of the speaker mounting projections 111a and 111b.

  Each of the upper speakers 30a and 30b has a light guide 124 disposed in an inner space 122 on the inner peripheral side such as a magnet 116, and an LED board on which an LED 125 is mounted close to the rear end of the light guide 124. When the LED 125 of the LED substrate 126 emits light, the light is emitted from the light guide 124 to the front side via the center cap 120 and the front cover 121.

  The light guide 124 and the center cap 120 are made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the front cover 121 is formed with a number of small holes 121a so that sound and light are emitted to the front side. The light guide 124 is inserted into the through hole 115b of the rear wall 115a of the speaker frame 115 and is detachably supported. An LED board 126 is detachably fixed to the back side of the rear wall 115a with screws or the like so that the LED 125 faces the light guide 124 in front and back. The front cover 121 may be colorless and transparent, colored and transparent, or opaque. When the front cover 121 is made of a colorless transparent or colored transparent synthetic resin, an irregular diffuse reflection portion is formed on the back side of the front cover 121 so that the light from the LED 125 causes the front cover 121 itself to emit light. Good.

  By attaching light emitting means such as the light guide 124 and the LED board 126 to the upper speakers 30a and 30b in this manner, light from the LEDs 125 of the LED board 126 is transmitted from the light guide 124 to the front side via the center cap 120 and the front cover 121. Can be irradiated. Therefore, the upper speakers 30a and 30b can be used not only for producing sound effects but also for producing light emission, and an effect that has not been achieved in the past can be expected.

  Of the first and second upper units 42a and 42b constituting the upper unit 42, the first upper unit 42a is a common component commonly used by a plurality of types of models, like the lower unit 41. The second upper unit 42b has a design, function, and the like unique to each model, and can be easily attached and detached as compared with the first upper unit 42a. In the upper unit 42 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, FIG. 18, etc., a portion corresponding to the left vertical base portion 28a is added to the first upper unit 42a, the upper base portion 27, and the right vertical base portion 28b. The corresponding portion is the second upper unit 42b, but the division of the first and second upper units 42a and 42b is arbitrary. Of course, the entire upper unit 42 may have a specific configuration for each model, and may be easily detachable.

  For example, when a plurality of types of models are manufactured, the first upper unit 42a is commonly used, and the second upper unit 42b having a configuration unique to each model is combined with the first upper unit 42a. Configure the peripheral part. With this configuration, different types of pachinko machines can be easily manufactured by changing the design and other configurations of the second upper unit 42b while commonly using the first upper unit 42a.

  The design and other configurations of the first upper unit 42a can be changed depending on the model of the pachinko machine. In that case, the door base 25 is common to a plurality of models. Therefore, in both the first upper unit 42a and the second upper unit 42b, electronic components and the like required in common for each model, such as the upper speakers 30a and 30b for generating sound effects and the intermediate speakers 31a and 31b, are included. Electronic components and the like specific to a specific model mounted on the door base 25 side are incorporated in the first upper unit 42a and the second upper unit 42b or the second upper unit 42b.

  The first upper unit 42a is disposed between the left upper speaker 30a and the left middle speaker 31a along the left side of the viewing window 24, as shown in FIGS. An LED substrate 131 which is disposed in a vertically elongated shape, is disposed on the front side of the door base 25, and has a large number of LEDs 130 mounted on the front surface, and a light emitting decoration in which the irregular reflection portion 132a is formed inside and covers the LED substrate 131 from the front side. The light emitting decoration cover 132 is provided with a cover 132 and an internal lens 133 disposed on the front side of the LED board 131 so that light from the LED 130 of the LED board 131 emits light.

  The LED substrate 131 is, for example, divided into a plurality of parts and connected by a connector 134 or the like. The light-emitting decorative cover 132 is made of a colorless and transparent or colored and transparent synthetic resin, and is provided with an irregularly-shaped irregular reflection portion 132a on the inner surface on the back side.

  As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the light emitting decorative cover 132 has an upper side 134a projecting forward from a lower side 134b, and as shown in FIG. 20 and the like, the upper side 134a has a receiving portion 114b of the speaker mounting protrusion 111a. , 114c. The space between the LED substrate 131 and the light emitting decoration cover 132 is large on the upper side and small on the lower side.

  As shown in FIGS. 23 to 25, the inner lens 133 is formed with a through hole 135 corresponding to each LED 130 on the upper side 134 a where the distance between the LED substrate 131 and the light emitting decoration cover 132 is large. A concave lens portion 136 having a conical or spherical shape is formed on the front side or the rear side corresponding to each LED 130 on the lower side 134b where the distance between the LED substrate 131 and the light emitting decoration cover 132 is small.

  Therefore, when each LED 130 of the LED board 131 emits light, on the upper side 134 a of the light emitting decoration cover 132, the light from the LED 130 irradiates directly to the irregular reflection part 132 a of the light emitting decoration cover 132 through the through hole 135. Since the space between the light emitting decoration cover 132 and the light emitting decoration cover 132 is large, the light from the LED 130 irradiates the diffusely reflecting portion 132a while being appropriately diffused.

  On the other hand, on the lower side 134b where the distance between the LED substrate 131 and the light emitting decoration cover 132 is small, the light from the LED 130 is diffused by the concave lens part 136 and irradiates the irregular reflection part 132a of the light emitting decoration cover 132. Therefore, uneven light emission between the upper side 134a and the lower side 134b of the light emitting decoration cover 132 can be prevented as much as possible, or the uneven light emission can be reduced.

  The concave lens portion 136 includes a conical concave portion 136a formed on the front surface of the internal lens 133, and a spherical protrusion 136b formed on the rear surface of the internal lens 133 corresponding to the conical concave portion 136a. The concave lens portion 136 only needs to have a light diffusing function, and the specific cross-sectional shape does not matter.

  As shown in FIGS. 1, 17, and 26 to 28, the second upper unit 42b is substantially L in front view extending from the left upper speaker 30a to the right intermediate speaker 31b via the right upper speaker 30b. For example, a horizontal unit 141 corresponding between the left and right upper speakers 30a and 30b, a vertical unit 142 corresponding between the upper speaker 30b and the middle speaker 31b, and the horizontal unit A unit reinforcing plate 143 that is substantially L-shaped as viewed from the rear side and is attached to the back side of the vertical unit portion 142 over the vertical unit portion 142, and the first and second positioning means 144 and 145 disposed at both ends. And a plurality of, for example, three first to third locking means 146 to 148 distributed and arranged, and a plurality of, for example, three screw-type first to third fixing means 149 distributed and arranged. It is detachably mounted from the front side with respect to the door base 25 by the 151 (FIG. 6, FIG. 7, etc.).

  The horizontal unit section 141 includes a unit main body section 152 and a frame movable rendering means 153 arranged at, for example, substantially the center of the unit main body section 152 in the left-right direction. As shown in FIGS. 29 to 32 and the like, the frame movable staging means 153 includes a movable portion 154 slidable substantially in the front-rear direction with respect to the unit main body 152, and the movable portion 154 Also has a driving means 140 for driving between the front side forward position and the moving direction of the movable portion 154 (hereinafter, simply referred to as “sliding direction”) as shown in FIG. 27 and the like. It has a downward slope.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 to 31 and the like, the movable portion 154 constituting the frame movable presentation means 153 includes a movable main body 155 and a frame movable body 156 disposed in front of the movable main body 155. . The movable main body 155 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape with its central axis directed in the sliding operation direction. For example, a first guide roller 158 corresponding to the first slide guide 157 on the unit main body 152 side is provided at the rear end side. A second guide roller 160 corresponding to the second slide guide 159 on the unit body 152 side, and a driven portion 161 that receives a driving force from the driving unit 140 are arranged.

  The first guide rollers 158 are rotatable, for example, about a left-right axis, and are arranged, for example, on the left and right sides of the movable main body 155 in plural numbers (two in this example) along the sliding operation direction. Like the first guide roller 158, the second guide rollers 160 are rotatable around the left-right axis, and are disposed, for example, one by one on the left and right sides of the movable main body 155, for example. The left and right second guide rollers 160 are arranged, for example, at positions inside the left and right first guide rollers 158 and shifted to one side (here, upward) in the vertical direction. The first guide roller 158 and the second guide roller 160 are supported by a movable guide sheet metal 162 fixed to the rear end of the movable main body 155.

  The driven part 161 is disposed, for example, below the rear end of the movable main body part 155, and includes, for example, a driven shaft 161a projecting substantially downward so as to be orthogonal to the sliding operation direction, and a driven shaft 161a. And a mounted bush 161b.

  In addition, a rotation guide 163, a ratchet pawl 164, a rotation lock lever 165, a rotation position detection unit 166, and the like are provided on the front end side of the movable main body 155. The rotation guide 163 is for rotatably supporting the frame movable body 156, and is formed in a short cylindrical shape having a smaller diameter than the outer peripheral wall 155a of the movable main body 155, and is integrally formed inside the outer peripheral wall 155a, for example. Is provided.

  The ratchet pawl 164 is for holding the frame movable body 156 at one or a plurality of rotation positions, and is movable between a protruding position that protrudes to the inner peripheral side of the rotation guide 163 and a retreat position that does not protrude. , At a predetermined position (here, an upper position) on the circumference of the rotation guide 163, and is elastically urged toward the protruding position by a spring 164a. As shown in FIG. 31, the tip of the ratchet pawl 164 is formed in a pointed shape by inclined surfaces formed on both sides in the circumferential direction of the rotation guide 163.

  The rotation lock lever 165 is for releasably locking the frame movable body 156 at one or a plurality of rotation positions, and is disposed, for example, on the front side of the front end of the movable main body 155 so as to be substantially along the outer peripheral wall 155a. A lock lever base 167 fixed to the outer peripheral side of the outer peripheral wall 155a is swingably supported around a rotation shaft 167a in the sliding operation direction. The rotation lock lever 165 has a substantially arc shape along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral wall 155a, and has a push operation portion 165a protruding toward the outside of the outer peripheral wall 155a at one end, and an inner peripheral surface of the outer peripheral wall 155a at the other end. Lock claw portions 165b projecting toward the sides are provided integrally with each other, and are supported by a rotation shaft 167a arranged substantially at the center in the longitudinal direction in a swingable state between a lock position and a lock release position. , And is biased toward the lock position by a spring 165c. The rotation lock lever 165 shifts from the locked position to the unlocked position when the pressing operation portion 165a is pressed against the urging force of the spring 165c.

  The rotation position detection means 166 detects the rotation position of the frame movable body 156, and is constituted by, for example, a photo sensor. When the rotation position of the frame movable body 156 is a predetermined origin rotation position, the frame movable For example, the detection unit 166a on the body 156 side is arranged to face forward near the rear side of the rotation guide 163 so as to be detectable, and is fixed to the movable main body unit 155 via the sensor base 168.

  The frame movable body 156 includes a decoration unit 169 and a decoration support 170 that supports the decoration unit 169 on the rear side. As shown in FIGS. 29 to 31, the decorative support 170 is provided concentrically with a first cylindrical portion 172 corresponding to the inner periphery of the rotation guide 163 on the movable main body 155 side and a front side of the first cylindrical portion 172. A second cylindrical portion 173 disposed and formed to have a diameter larger than that of the first cylindrical portion 172; and a fixed member disposed in front of the second cylindrical portion 173 and extending radially outward of the second cylindrical portion 173. For example, the base portion 174 is integrally provided, and the first cylindrical portion 172 is inserted into the rotation guide 163 from the front side, and the retaining member 175 formed in a substantially disc shape having a larger diameter than the rotation guide 163 is rotated. By being fixed to the rear end side of the first cylindrical portion 172 from the rear side of the guide 163, it is rotatably supported with respect to the movable main body portion 155. A rotation bush 176 is arranged between the rotation guide 163 and the first cylindrical portion 172 on the front edge side.

  The retaining member 175 is provided with, for example, a detection portion 166a having a protruding rearward shape in the vicinity of the outer edge portion on the back side. When the rotation position of the frame movable body 156 is the origin rotation position shown in FIG. The rotational position detecting means 166 on the main body 155 detects the detected portion 166a.

  Further, the retaining member 175 is formed with a rotation preventing portion 175a at a predetermined position on the outer periphery thereof, for example, in a radially outwardly projecting shape. The rotation preventing portion 175a limits the rotation of the frame movable body 156 to a certain range (here, between the origin rotation position and the storage rotation position), and as shown in FIG. Along with the rotation, the movable body 155 moves between the first regulating part 177a and the second regulating part 177b on the side of the movable main body part 155. For example, when the frame movable body 156 comes to the origin rotating position, the first regulating part 177a substantially moves. When the frame movable body 156 comes to the storage rotation position, it comes into substantially contact with the second regulating portion 177b.

  On the outer peripheral side of the first cylindrical portion 172, for example, V-shaped grooves 178 formed in the axial direction are arranged at one or a plurality of positions in the circumferential direction. The V groove 178 corresponds to the ratchet pawl 164, and the ratchet pawl 164 is engaged with the V groove 178, whereby the frame movable body 156 is held at that position. Since the tip of the ratchet pawl 164 has a pointed shape corresponding to the V-groove 178, the holding force is weak, and by applying a certain or more rotational force to the frame movable body 156, the ratchet pawl 164 is attached with a spring 164a. It moves to the retreat position side along the slope of the V groove 178 against the force, and the holding state is released.

  One or more V-grooves 178 are provided corresponding to one or more rotational positions of the frame movable body 156. In the present embodiment, a total of five V-grooves 178 are provided corresponding to the origin rotation position, the storage rotation position, and, for example, three places that equally divide them, but the V-groove 178 corresponds to the origin rotation position. May be provided only at the position corresponding to the original position, or may be provided only at a position corresponding to the origin rotation position and the storage rotation position. Of course, when three or more V-grooves 178 are provided, they need not be equally spaced.

  On the outer peripheral side of the second cylindrical portion 173, for example, lock grooves 179 formed in the axial direction are arranged at one or a plurality of positions in the circumferential direction. The lock groove 179 corresponds to the lock claw 165b of the rotation lock lever 165. When the lock claw 165b of the rotation lock lever 165 engages with the lock groove 179, the frame movable body 156 rotates at that position. Locked to impossible state. Since the rotation lock lever 165 is urged toward the lock position by the spring 165c, when the lock claw 165b engages with the lock groove 179, the locked state is maintained. In order to rotate the frame movable body 156 from this state, the pressing operation portion 165a is pressed to move the rotation lock lever 165 to the unlock position, and the engagement between the lock claw portion 165b and the lock groove 179 is released. There is a need.

  One or more lock grooves 179 are provided corresponding to one or more rotational positions of the frame movable body 156. In this embodiment, a total of three lock grooves 179 are provided corresponding to the origin rotation position, the storage rotation position, and, for example, one position (intermediate rotation position) that equally divides them. As described above, all the lock grooves 179 correspond to any of the plurality of V grooves 178, respectively. The lock groove 179 may be provided only at a position corresponding to the origin rotation position, or may be provided only at a position corresponding to the origin rotation position and the storage rotation position. Of course, when three or more lock grooves 179 are provided, they need not be equally spaced. Also, all the lock grooves and all the V grooves may be made to correspond one-to-one.

  The decoration unit 169 is, for example, flat in the front and rear direction, as shown in FIG. 26, for example, as shown in FIG. 26, a frame first decoration part 180 a arranged in the center in the left-right direction, and a pair of left and right sides arranged in the frame first decoration part 180 a The frame second decorative portion 180b has a predetermined three-dimensional shape, and is arranged such that the lower side of the frame first decorative portion 180a corresponds to the front side of the movable main body 155. The frame movable body 156 is visually integrated with the panel movable body 371 when the panel movable body 371 described later is raised to the upper limit position and has a specific relative positional relationship. For example, the frame-shaped first decorative portion 180a having a circular shape in a front view corresponds to the head (or front body) of the butterfly, and the frame-shaped first decorative portion 180a is formed. The frame second decorative portion 180b that extends leftward, rightward, and upward corresponds to the front wing of a butterfly.

  Note that the decoration unit 169 is arranged substantially perpendicular to the sliding operation direction as shown in FIG. That is, the frame movable body 156 is disposed so as to be inclined forward by a predetermined angle and the front surface is obliquely downward and forward.

  As shown in FIGS. 26 to 30 and the like, the decoration unit 169 includes a decoration base 181 that forms the back side of the frame first and second decoration parts 180a and 180b, and a decoration base 181 that forms the frame first and second decoration parts 180a and 180b. Light-emitting decorative covers 182a and 182b each constituting a front side, decorative frames 183a and 183b mounted on the front side along the outer periphery of the decorative base 181, and supporting the light-emitting decorative covers 182a and 182b on the outer peripheral side; 1, LED boards 184a, 184b disposed between the decoration base 181 and the light-emitting decoration covers 182a, 182b corresponding to the second decoration sections 180a, 180b, and a rotating body disposed in the frame first decoration section 180a. 185, and a rotation driving means 186 for driving the rotating body 185 to rotate. The decoration base 181 is provided on the fixed base portion 174 on the decoration support 170 side. It is detachably fixed to the side.

  The decorative base 181 is, for example, non-translucent. As shown in FIG. 30, a bearing 187 is provided substantially in the center of the frame first decorative portion 180a along the sliding operation direction. A rotation shaft 185a of the body 185 is rotatably inserted. The rotator 185 is formed in a three-dimensional shape that resembles, for example, a windmill (a pinwheel), and is fixed to the front end side of the rotating shaft 185a. The decoration base 181 has a bulging portion 188 that bulges rearward, for example, below the bearing portion 187, and a rotation driving unit such as a stepping motor is provided on the back surface 188 a of the bulging portion 188. 186 is mounted with its drive shaft 186a protruding forward. The rotation driving means 186 is arranged in the first and second cylindrical portions 172 and 173 of the decorative support 170.

  A drive gear 189 is fixed to the front end of the drive shaft 186a of the rotation drive means 186, and a driven gear 190 is fixed to the rear end of the rotation shaft 185a. And are engaged. Thereby, the driving force of the rotation driving means 186 is transmitted to the rotating body 185 via the driving gear 189, the driven gear 190, and the rotating shaft 185a, and the rotating body 185 rotates.

  As shown in FIGS. 26 and 30, the LED substrate 184a corresponding to the frame first decorative portion 180a is substantially circular with the rotation shaft 185a as the center, and is arranged on the rear side of the rotating body 185, and has a front side. , A plurality of LEDs 191a are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction in the vicinity of the outer peripheral portion, and a plurality of LEDs 191b are similarly arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction on the inner circumferential side. In the vicinity of the front side of the LED board 184a, an annular reflector 192 is arranged in front of the LED 191a, 191b corresponding to the arrangement position of the LED 191a, 191b, and a substantially circular inner lens 193 is located inside the arrangement position of the LEDs 191a, 191b. Are located. The light-emitting decorative cover 182a corresponding to the frame first decorative portion 180a is made of a colorless transparent or colored transparent synthetic resin in which the internal rotating body 185 is visible, and has a bowl shape that covers the outer peripheral side from the front side of the rotating body 185. Is formed.

  The reflector 192 is for guiding light from the LED 191a on the outer peripheral side to the light emitting decoration cover 182a side and guiding light from the LED 191b on the inner peripheral side to the inner lens 193 side, and is formed of a non-translucent synthetic resin. The outer ring portion 192a corresponding to the outer peripheral side LED 191a and the inner ring portion 192b corresponding to the inner peripheral side LED 191b are integrally provided. As shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 30, a light guide hole 192c penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the outer ring portion 192a in correspondence with each LED 191a, and the outer ring portion 192a is provided in the light guide hole 192c with the LED 191a. Is substantially in contact with the front side of the LED substrate 184a in a state where the LED board 184a is accommodated.

  As shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 26, the inner lens 193 has a cutout portion 193a corresponding to the LED 191b formed on the outer peripheral side, and is arranged along the front surface of the LED substrate 184a inside the outer ring portion 192a of the reflector 192. I have. The inner ring portion 192b extends at least to the inside of the cutout portion 193a along the front surface of the inner lens 193 on the inner peripheral side of the outer ring portion 192a. On the front side of the reflector 192, a support groove 192d is provided over the entire circumference at a position corresponding to the front side of the light guide hole 192c, and the rear end side of the light-emitting decorative cover 182a is fitted into the support groove 192d from the front side. are doing. Thus, the light from the outer LED 191a is guided to the light emitting decoration cover 182a by turning the light guide hole 192c, and the light from the inner LED 191b is turned to the inner lens 193 by turning the inner ring portion 192b and the like. . Accordingly, it is possible to individually emit light from the light emitting decoration cover 182a on the front side of the rotating body 185 and the inner lens 193 on the rear side of the rotating body 185.

  The LED substrate 184b corresponding to the frame second decorative portion 180b has a shape corresponding to substantially the entire frame first decorative portion 180a as shown in FIG. 26, and includes, for example, two types of LEDs (first light emitters) on the front side thereof. ) 194a and 194b are respectively arranged in plurality. The LEDs 194a are arranged at substantially equal intervals at positions corresponding to the outer periphery of the “butterfly” formed by the frame movable body 156 and the panel movable body 371, and can emit light of a single color such as white. The LEDs 194b are, for example, substantially uniformly dispersed in the internal area of the "butterfly", and are capable of emitting light of, for example, multiple colors. The light-emitting decorative cover 182b corresponding to the frame second decorative portion 180b is made of a colorless and transparent or colored and transparent synthetic resin, and has an irregularly-reflective portion having an irregular shape on the inner surface on the back side. Note that the LED 194a and the LED 194b may be of the same type.

  As shown in FIGS. 26 and 28, the unit body 152 includes an upper wall 195 disposed substantially horizontally, a front wall 196 on the front side, a lower peripheral wall 197 from the lower side to the left side, and a rear wall 197. For example, the rear wall portion 198 is formed in a substantially box shape with the right side opening.

  The unit main body 152 is provided with a recessed portion 201 that is recessed inward (substantially upward) from the lower surface side in a front view, for example, at a position slightly leftward from a substantially center in the left-right direction. The left part also constitutes a left connecting part 202 visually connected to the first upper unit 42a and the speaker mounting projection 111a, and the part on the right side of the recessed part 201 has a frame protruding downward. The movable body 203 is configured.

  The frame non-movable body 203 is a portion that forms a “butterfly” as a specific form together with the frame movable body 156 and the board movable body 371, and is disposed, for example, at the lower right of the frame movable body 156 in a front view as shown in FIG. The left wall portion 203a is formed substantially in the vertical direction, the lower wall portion 203b is formed in a slightly downwardly inclined shape, and the front side is recessed rearward as shown in FIG. , A decorative cover 204 is attached so as to substantially fill the space. At least a part of the decorative cover 204 is a colorless transparent or colored transparent light emitting lens part 204a, and an LED substrate 206 is disposed inside the decorative lens 204. On the inner surface side of the light emitting lens portion 204a, an irregularly-shaped irregular reflection portion is provided.

  On the front side of the LED substrate 206, for example, two types of LEDs 205a and 205b are arranged. One or more LEDs 205a are arranged at positions corresponding to the outer periphery of the "butterfly" formed together with the frame movable body 156 and the panel movable body 371, and can emit light of a single color such as white, for example, like the LED 194a. Has become. The LEDs 205b are, for example, substantially uniformly distributed on the left side of the LED 205a so as to correspond to, for example, the internal region of the "butterfly", and can emit, for example, multicolor light, similarly to the LED 194b.

  As shown in FIG. 32, a movable body mounting hole 207 is formed substantially at the center of the front wall 196 of the unit main body 152, and a space behind the movable body mounting hole 207 in the unit main body 152 is formed. The main body 155 of the movable portion 154 is housed in the frame movable body housing 208 from the front side of the unit main body 152 via the movable body mounting hole 207 so as to be able to move back and forth. ing.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 and 32, a pair of first slide guides 157 are provided on the left and right sides of the frame movable body accommodating section 208 in the unit main body section 152. Two slide guides 159 are arranged respectively. The first slide guide 157 is provided on a pair of left and right first guide bases 209 made of, for example, a synthetic resin, and is formed in a front-falling elongated hole shape along the sliding operation direction. The first guide rollers 158 provided individually are slidably or rollably engaged.

  The second slide guide 159 is a pair of left and right inclined surfaces formed along the sliding operation direction on the lower surface side of the second guide base 210 made of, for example, a synthetic resin. The second guide rollers 160 provided are substantially in contact with each other in a slidable or rolling manner from below.

  As described above, the movable portion 154 is moved to the original position by moving the first guide roller 158 along the first slide guide 157 and moving the second guide roller 160 along the second slide guide 159 (FIG. 27). In the sliding operation direction between a forward position (indicated by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 27) and a forward position (indicated by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 27).

  Note that the first guide base 209 and the second guide base 210 are supported by the unit main body 152 via a guide base frame 211 made of sheet metal. The guide base frame 211 includes an upper plate portion 211a disposed substantially in parallel below the upper wall portion 195 of the unit main body 152, and left and right positions disposed downward along both left and right edges of the upper plate portion 211a. A first guide base 209 is provided, for example, on the outer surface side of the left and right side plate portions 211b, and a second guide base 210 is provided on the inner surface side of the left and right side plate portions 211b and on the lower surface side of the upper plate portion 211a. Each is detachably mounted.

  In the unit main body 152, a drive base plate 212 is disposed below the frame movable body accommodating portion 208, and slides on the drive base plate 212 to guide the driven portion 161 on the movable portion 154 side. The operation of the guide 213, the spring 214 for urging the movable part 154 to one side in the sliding operation direction, for example, the forward position, the driving force transmitting means 215 for transmitting the driving force of the driving means 140 to the movable part 154, and the operation of the movable part 154 A frame movable body position detecting means 216 for detecting the position is disposed. As shown in FIGS. 29 and 32, the drive base plate 212 slightly extends, for example, along the sliding operation direction, corresponding to a range from the lower side of the frame movable body housing 208 to one of the left and right sides, for example, the right side. It is arranged in a downwardly inclined shape and is detachably fixed to the unit body 152.

  As shown in FIGS. 33 to 35, the slide guide 213 is formed in a long hole shape in the front-rear direction corresponding to the driven part 161 on the movable part 154 side, and the driven part 161 is inserted downward. The spring 214 is an elongated coil spring, and is disposed on one side of the slide guide 213, for example, on the left side. One end of the spring 214 is fixed to, for example, the drive base plate 212 near the rear end of the slide guide 213, and the other end is The movable body portion 155 is fixed to, for example, a rear end side, and is wound around a pulley 217 arranged near the front end side of the slide guide 213, thereby being arranged in a substantially U-shape in plan view.

  The driving force transmission means 215 includes a driving arm 218, a cam gear 219, an idle gear 220, a driving gear 221 and the like as shown in FIGS. Note that, in addition to the drive shaft 140 a of the drive means 140, the rotation shafts of the drive arm 218, the cam gear 219, the idle gear 220, and the like are all arranged in a direction orthogonal to the plate surface of the drive base plate 212.

  The drive arm 218 is disposed, for example, on the lower surface side of the drive base plate 212, one end of the drive arm 218 is rotatably supported by an arm shaft 218 a, and the drive connection part 218 b provided on the other end is driven relative to the driven part 161. The arm 218 is slidably engaged in the longitudinal direction. Note that the arm shaft 218a is disposed on the right side in a substantially central portion in the front-rear direction of the slide guide 213. The drive arm 218 has a guide hole 218c formed at an intermediate portion thereof along the longitudinal direction. As described above, the drive arm 218 can swing between the rear origin driving position and the front forward driving position about the arm shaft 218a, and the movable part 154 is driven via the driven part 161 accordingly. It slides along the slide guide 213 between the origin position and the forward position.

  The drive arm 218 is provided, for example, integrally with a detected portion 218d that protrudes outward in the radial direction, for example, at an end on the arm shaft 218a side. Further, on the lower surface side of the drive base plate 212, a frame movable body position detecting means 216 composed of a photo sensor or the like is arranged corresponding to the detected portion 218d. In the present embodiment, two frame movable body position detecting means 216, that is, origin position detecting means 216a and advance position detecting means 216b, are provided. When the movable part 154 is at the original position, the origin position detecting means 216a is movable. When the reference numeral 154 is at the forward position, the forward position detecting means 216b detects the detected portion 218d.

  The drive arm 218 is elastically urged by a spring 222, for example, toward the rear, that is, toward the origin drive position. As described above, the movable portion 154 of the present embodiment is urged toward the forward position by the spring 214 and toward the origin position by the spring 222 via the drive arm 218. The urging force of the spring 214 toward the forward position is larger than the urging force.

  The cam gear 219 is disposed, for example, on the upper surface side of the drive base plate 212, and includes a cam shaft 219a at a predetermined position near the outer peripheral portion. The camshaft 219a penetrates downward through an arc-shaped insertion hole 223 provided in the drive base plate 212, and slidably engages with the guide hole 218c of the drive arm 218 below the drive base plate 212. I have. The cam gear 219 has a center axis 219b disposed between the slide guide 213 and the arm axis 218a. When the cam gear 219 rotates in a range of about 180 degrees between the first rotation position shown in FIG. 34 and the second rotation position shown in FIG. 35, the drive arm 218 moves between the origin driving position and the forward driving position. Rocks between. When the cam gear 219 is at the first rotation position and the driving arm 218 is at the origin driving position, as shown in FIG. 34B, the direction connecting the center shaft 219b of the cam gear 219 and the cam shaft 219a. And the direction of the guide hole 218c of the drive arm 218 are substantially orthogonal, so that the drive arm 218 is locked at the origin driving position against the urging force of the spring 214.

  The idle gear 220 is, for example, a two-stage gear integrally provided with a first gear 220a and a second gear 220b in the axial direction. The idle gear 220 is disposed above, for example, the drive base plate 212 with the second gear 220b meshed with the cam gear 219. Have been.

  A screw base 224 protrudes, for example, on the upper side of the drive base plate 212. On the screw base 224, a driving unit 140 such as a stepping motor is disposed with the drive shaft 140a facing downward. I have. A drive gear 221 is fixed to the drive shaft 140 a of the drive means 140, and the drive gear 221 meshes with the first gear 220 a of the idle gear 220.

  When the driving means 140 operates in the forward direction with the movable portion 154 at the home position (FIG. 34), the drive arm 218 moves from the home drive position to the forward drive position via the drive gear 221, the idle gear 220, and the cam gear 219. As a result, the movable portion 154 moves forward from the origin position to the forward position, and the origin position detection means 216a changes from ON to OFF. Then, when the drive arm 218 reaches the forward drive position and the movable section 154 reaches the forward position (FIG. 35), the forward position detection means 216b changes from OFF to ON and the drive means 140 stops. When the driving means 140 operates in the reverse direction from this state, the movable portion 154 returns to the origin position through a process reverse to the above (FIG. 34). As described above, in the frame movable staging means 153 of the present embodiment, the drive means 140 is operated in both the forward and reverse directions to move the frame movable body 156 forward and downward between the origin position and the forward position forward. It can be moved back and forth along the sliding movement direction.

  Further, the frame movable body 156 is rotatable around an axis substantially in the front-rear direction (slide operation direction). For example, when packing for transportation, the pressing operation section 165a of the rotation lock lever 165 is pressed to lock. , It is possible to rotate from the origin rotation position (FIG. 36 (a)) to the storage rotation position (FIG. 36 (c)) via the intermediate rotation position (FIG. 36 (b)). The frame movable body 156 greatly protrudes above the upper wall portion 195 of the unit main body 152 at the origin rotation position shown in FIG. 36A, but the whole of the frame movable body 156 at the storage rotation position shown in FIG. It fits below the upper wall 195 and can be compactly packed. When the package is unpacked, the rotation of the rotation lock lever 165 is again depressed to release the lock, and the storage rotation position (FIG. 36 (c)) is shifted to the intermediate rotation position (FIG. 36 (b)). )) And then rotate to the origin rotation position (FIG. 36A). Further, the driving of the frame movable body 156 by the driving means 140 may be performed on condition that it is determined that the frame movable body 156 is at the origin rotational position based on the detection signal of the rotation position detecting means 166. Good.

  As shown in FIGS. 6, 17 and 32, a cutout 225 is formed in the upper wall portion 195, for example, on the front edge side, and when the frame movable body 156 is at the origin position, the rotation lock lever 165 is turned off. The pressing operation unit 165a is exposed to the upper side through the notch 225. As described above, in order to prevent operation due to tampering, the pressing operation portion 165a of the rotation lock lever 165 is disposed on the rear side of the frame movable body 156, and when the frame movable body 156 is at the origin rotation position, the frame movable body 156 It is hidden behind and invisible from the front.

  As shown in FIGS. 26 to 28 and the like, the vertical unit section 142 includes a unit main body 231, operation effecting means 232 arranged at, for example, substantially the center in the vertical direction of the unit main body 231, and And a blowing means 233 arranged on the upper side.

  As shown in FIGS. 37 to 41 and the like, the operation effecting means 232 includes an operation handle 234, a slide support means 235 for holding the operation handle 234 movably in the front-rear direction, and an operation for driving the operation handle 234 in the front-rear direction. A handle driving means 236, a driving force transmitting means 237 for transmitting the driving force of the operating handle driving means 236 to the operating handle 234, an operating handle position detecting means 238 for detecting an operating position of the operating handle 234, a slide supporting means 235, An operation handle base 239 for supporting the operation handle driving means 236 and the like is provided.

  In the present embodiment, origin position detecting means 238a for detecting that the operating handle 234 is at the original position, front end position detecting means 238b for detecting that the operating handle 234 is at the front end position, and the operating handle 234 being pushed in. And three kinds of operation handle position detecting means 238, which are a push position detecting means 238c for detecting that the operating position is in the range. The origin position, front end position, and pushing position of the operation handle 234 will be described later.

  As shown in FIGS. 37 to 39 and the like, the operation handle 234 has a tubular body, for example, a substantially cylindrical handle body 241 arranged substantially in the front-rear direction, and a handle arranged on the front end side of the handle body 241. An operation unit 242 is provided. For example, a pair of slide members 243a and 243b are disposed on the left and right sides of the inside of the handle body 241 at the rear end side, and a driven part 244 is disposed at a predetermined position (upper portion in this case) on the circumference.

  The left and right slide members 243a and 243b are detachably fixed to the inner surface side of the handle main body 241. For example, a guide roller 246 corresponding to the slide guide 245 of the slide support means 235 is provided on the facing surface thereof. A plurality (two in this case) is arranged along the front-rear direction, and a slide projection 248 is integrally provided on one of the upper and lower sides, for example, as shown in FIGS. The slide protrusion 248 has a slide hole 248 a through which the slide shaft 247 of the slide support means 235 is inserted.

  The driven part 244 receives a driving force from the operating handle driving means 236, and extends from the rear end outer peripheral side (here, upper side) of the handle main body 241 to the center axis side (here, lower side) of the handle main body 241. ) And a bush 244b mounted on the driven shaft 244a.

  The handle operation portion 242 is a portion that is gripped by the player, and is attached to the front end of the handle main body 241 so as to protrude, for example, over the entire periphery of the handle main body 241. And a front cover 250 that covers the front side of the opening / closing cover 418, and an LED board 251 and the like are disposed inside. At least a part of the front cover 250 forms a light emitting lens unit. Note that the handle operation unit 242 is not perpendicular to the axial direction (front-back direction) of the handle main body 241 but is slightly obliquely forward facing left toward the player.

  Further, one or more (here, two) vibration means 252 are disposed inside the handle operation section 242 or the handle main body 241 at, for example, the front end side of the operation handle 234. By operating the vibration means 252, the handle operation part 242 vibrates.

  As shown in FIGS. 37, 40, 41, etc., the slide support means 235 includes a pair of left and right guide members 253a, 253b, and a connecting member 254 for connecting the left and right guide members 253a, 253b.

  The guide members 253a and 253b are elongated in the front-rear direction and are opposed to each other at a predetermined interval on the left and right sides, and the rear ends thereof are fixed to the operation handle base 239, and are inserted into the handle main body 241 of the operation handle 234 from behind. Has been inserted. Slide guides 245 are formed in the left and right guide members 253a and 253b, respectively, in the shape of a long hole in the front-rear direction. The slide guides 245 are provided with two guide rollers 246 provided left and right in the handle main body 241. Sliding or rolling engagement.

  A slide shaft 247 is disposed in the front-rear direction near the left and right slide guides 245, and both front and rear ends are supported by guide members 253a and 253b. The slide shaft 247 is inserted into a slide hole 248a provided in the slide protrusion 248 of the slide members 243a and 243b. The guide members 253a and 253b are reinforced by guide sheet metals 255a and 255b, respectively.

  As described above, the operation handle 234 is pushed in by the guide rollers 246 of the slide members 243a and 243b moving along the slide guide, and the slide protrusions 248 of the slide members 243a and 243b move along the slide shaft 247. It is slidable in the front-rear direction between the position and a front end position (FIGS. 39 and 41) on the front side thereof. The origin position (FIGS. 38 and 40) of the operation handle 234 is set slightly before the push position between the push position and the front end position, and the operation handle 234 is at least between the origin position and the push position. , Spring 256 is elastically biased forward. The spring 256 is a coil spring having a predetermined length, and is inserted through the slide shaft 247 behind the slide protrusion 248.

  The connecting member 254 connects the guide members 253a and 253b to the left and right, and is arranged on the front end side of the guide members 253a and 253b.

  Further, for example, a front end position detecting unit 238b is disposed on the front end side of the guide members 253a and 253b, and a pushing position detecting unit 238c is disposed on the rear end side. The front end position detecting means 238b is, for example, a photo sensor, and is disposed, for example, below the connecting member 254. When the operation handle 234 comes to the front end position, a detected object provided at, for example, a lower rear side of the handle main body 241 is provided. The unit 257 is detected. Further, the push-in position detecting means 238c is also a photo sensor, for example, arranged at the lower rear end of one of the guide members 253a, for example, when the operation handle 234 comes to the push-in position (FIG. 42). Detected portion 258 provided in 243a is detected.

  Further, a handle cover 259 formed in a front-rear direction and covering the handle main body 241 of the operation handle 234 is mounted on the front side of the operation handle base 239.

  The driving force transmitting means 237 includes a feed screw 261 for moving the driven portion 244 of the operation handle 234 back and forth, and a feed screw gear rotating integrally with the feed screw 261 as shown in FIGS. 262, a drive gear 263 fixed to the drive shaft 236 a of the operation handle drive means 236, and a gear train 264 arranged between the drive gear 263 and the feed screw gear 262.

  The feed screw 261 has a rod shape elongated in the front-rear direction, and is disposed, for example, between the left and right guide members 253a and 253b. It is supported in a state. Note that a feed screw gear 262 that rotates integrally with the feed screw 261 is disposed on the rear end side of the feed screw 261. A spiral feed groove 265 is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the feed screw 261, and the driven portion 244 of the operation handle 234 is slidably engaged with the feed groove 265, for example, from above. As a result, when the feed screw 261 rotates, the driven part 244 is guided in the feed groove 265 and moves in the front-back direction, and accordingly, the operation handle 234 moves in the front-back direction between the origin position and the front end position.

  At the rear end of the feed groove 265, a widened portion 266 having a wider groove width than other portions is provided. The widened portion 266 widens to the rear side, and the play of the driven portion 244 in the front-rear direction is larger than that of other portions. The position of the operation handle 234 when the driven portion 244 is on the front end side in the widened portion 266 is the origin position (FIG. 38), and the position of the operation handle 234 when the driven portion 244 is on the rear end side is the pushing position (FIG. 42). Since the operation handle 234 is urged toward the origin position (front side) by the spring 256 at least between the origin position and the pushing position, even if the driven portion 244 reaches the widened portion 266, the operation handle 234 is moved forward. Is held at the origin position, but when the player pushes backward against the urging force of the spring 256, the operation handle 234 can be moved to the pushed position.

  The operation handle driving unit 236 is configured by a stepping motor or the like, and is disposed, for example, above the feed screw 261, and is mounted on the front side of the operation handle base 239 with the drive shaft 236a facing rearward, for example. . A drive gear 263 is mounted on the drive shaft 236a. The gear train 264 arranged between the drive gear 263 and the feed screw gear 262 is constituted by, for example, a plurality of (five in this case) gears, each of which is rotatably mounted on the front side of the operation handle base 239. I have.

  In addition, an origin position detecting means 238a is disposed in front of the operation handle base 239. The origin position detecting means 238a is, for example, a photo sensor, and detects the detected portion 269 when the operation handle 234 comes to the origin position. The detected portion 269 protrudes, for example, in the vicinity of the outer peripheral portion of the sensor gear 270 interlocked with the feed screw 261. The sensor gear 270 is arranged, for example, below the feed screw 261 and in front of the operation handle base 239, and is interlocked with the feed screw gear 262 via the idle gear 271.

  As described above, in the operation effecting means 232 of this embodiment, the operation handle drive means 236 is operated in both the forward and reverse directions to move the operation handle 234 to the origin position (shown by a solid line in FIG. 27) and the front side thereof. It can be moved back and forth between a front end position (indicated by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 27), and the operating handle 234 can be vibrated by operating the vibration means 252. In the state where the operation handle 234 is at the origin position, as shown in FIG. 42, the player can push the operation handle 234 to the pushing position (indicated by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 27).

  As shown in FIGS. 26 to 28 and the like, the unit main body 231 forms an upper wall 281 arranged substantially horizontally, a left wall 282 and a right wall 283 forming left and right side surfaces, and a lower surface. 284, a front decorative cover 285 covering the front side, and a base metal plate 286 on the back side are formed in a substantially box shape. The operation effecting means 232 is arranged in the unit main body 231 in a state where the operation handle 234 and a front portion of the handle cover 259 covering the operation handle 234 are projected forward through an opening 287 formed in the front decoration cover 285, For example, an operation handle base 239 is fixed to the front side of the base sheet metal 286.

  In the unit main body 231, for example, a blower 233 is disposed above the operation handle 234 as shown in FIG. 26. The blower means 233 is a sirocco fan or the like in which an impeller is incorporated in a blower case 233a, and can blow air from a blower port 288 formed in the front decoration cover 285 to, for example, the handle operation section 242 of the operation handle 234. Has become.

  Further, at least a part of the front decorative cover 285 constitutes a light emitting lens portion, and LED boards 289 are arranged on the rear side, for example, above and below the operation handle 234, respectively.

  The unit main body portion 152 of the horizontal unit portion 141 and the unit main body portion 231 of the vertical unit portion 142 are connected to each other by a sheet metal unit reinforcing plate 143 disposed on the back side thereof, and are connected to one second upper unit 42b. Is composed.

  As shown in FIGS. 17, 21, and 22, an opening 291 corresponding to the speaker mounting projection 111b for the upper speaker 30b is provided on the back side of the second upper unit 42b. The speaker mounting projection 111b can be freely inserted into and removed from the opening 291. The upper inner wall 291a of the opening 291 can be placed on the upper surface of the receiving portion 114d of the speaker mounting projection 111b. Also, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 20, the speaker mounting projection 111a has a receiving portion 114c for the second upper unit 42b, and the end of the second upper unit 42b on the speaker mounting projection 111a side has: An overlapping portion 292 that overlaps the receiving portion 114c from above is provided integrally with the upper wall portion 195, for example.

  With such a configuration, when the second upper unit 42b is mounted on the front side of the door base 25, the speaker mounting protrusion 111b is used for guiding the opening 291 and the speaker mounting protrusion 111a is connected to the overlapping portion 292. The second upper unit 42b can be easily arranged at a predetermined mounting position on the door base 25 side while using the respective guides for the guidance.

  After the opening 291 and the overlapping portion 292 of the second upper unit 42b correspond to the left and right speaker mounting protrusions 111a, 111b, the second upper unit 42b is moved to the door base 25 via the speaker mounting protrusions 111a, 111b. It is possible to perform positioning and the like while supporting substantially the entire load on the second upper unit 42b side by the speaker mounting protrusions 111a and 111b. Therefore, it is not necessary for the worker to always support the load of the second upper unit 42b during the mounting work of the second upper unit 42b, and the burden on the worker at the time of mounting can be reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 17, the first positioning means 144 is disposed on the top end side (left end side) of the second upper unit 42b, and the second positioning means 145 is disposed on the lower end side of the second upper unit 42b. I have. As shown in FIG. 20 and the like, the first positioning means 144 includes a positioning recess 144a formed in the receiving portion 114c of the speaker mounting protrusion 111a and a positioning recess formed in the overlapping portion 292 at the end of the second upper unit 42b. A projection 144b is provided, and the top end side of the second upper unit 42b can be positioned in the front-rear and left-right directions by the positioning projection 144b and the positioning recess 144a.

  The positioning recess 144a and the positioning protrusion 144b are formed in an L-shape in a plan view on an inner portion of the speaker mounting protrusion 111a. The first positioning means 144 may have a positioning recess 144a in the overlapping portion 292 and a positioning protrusion 144b in the receiving portion 114c. Further, the first positioning means 144 may have another structure.

  As shown in FIGS. 43 (a) and 43 (b), the second positioning means 145 has a positioning hole 145a formed in the door base 25 or the vertical reinforcing member 33b thereof and a bent portion formed at the lower end side of the unit reinforcing plate 143. The positioning hole 145a and the positioning protrusion 145b allow the lower end of the side of the second upper unit 42b to be positioned in the left-right direction with respect to the door base 25.

  As shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 43 (b), there is a vertical space between the positioning holes 145a and the positioning protrusions 145b, which is necessary for engaging and disengaging the locking means 146 to 148. The second positioning means 145 may be provided with a positioning hole 145a on the unit reinforcing plate 143 and a positioning protrusion 145b on the door base 25. Further, the second positioning means 145 may have another structure.

  Therefore, when the second upper unit 42b is mounted, the second upper unit 42b is closed by the plurality of first to third locking means 146 to 148 and first to third fixing means 149 to 151 arranged at the intermediate portion. Although fixed to the base 25, by providing the first and second positioning means 144 and 145 at both ends of the second upper unit 42b, the left and right positions and the like at both ends of the second upper unit 42b can be reliably regulated. it can. Therefore, there is an advantage that misalignment of the lower end side of the second upper unit 42b due to mischief of the player or the like can be prevented.

  As shown in FIG. 44 to FIG. 46, the first to third locking means 146 to 148 are provided at three positions of an upper end side (left end side), a side upper end side, and a side middle part of the second upper unit 42b. , Which are provided with locking claws 146a to 148a integrally provided downward on the unit reinforcing plate 143 and hole-shaped locking portions 146b to 148b provided on the vertical reinforcing member 33b. The locking means 147 is provided with a clamping means 293.

  The protruding length of each of the locking claws 146a to 148a of the first to third locking means 146 to 148 is the largest for the third locking means 148, and the length of the first locking means 146 and the second locking means 147. It is shorter in order. That is, the engagement lengths 146c to 148c between the locking claws 146a to 148a of the first to third locking means 146 to 148 and the locking portions 146b to 148b are: engagement length 148c> engagement length 146c> There is a relationship of the engagement length 147c.

  The engagement lengths 146c to 148c of the first to third locking means 146 to 148 are set such that engagement length 148c> engagement length 146c> engagement length 147c. When the second upper unit 42b is locked to the door base 25 by engaging the locking claws 146a to 148a of the locking means 146 to 148 with the locking portions 146b to 148b, the third locking means 148, The first to third locking means 146 to 148 can be sequentially engaged in the order of the stopping means 146 and the second locking means 147. Therefore, the locking claws 146a to 148a can be more easily engaged with the locking portions 146b to 148b than when the first to third locking means 146 to 148 are simultaneously engaged.

  Any one of the engagement lengths 146c to 148c of the first to third locking means 146 to 148 may be maximized, and the other two engagement lengths may be substantially the same. For example, the engagement length 148c of the third locking means 148 is maximized, and the engagement lengths 146c, 147c of the first and second locking means 146, 147 are substantially the same length shorter than the engagement length 148c. It is also possible. In this case, when the second upper unit 42b is mounted, the locking means 146 to 148 are sequentially switched from the lower third locking means 148 to the upper first and second locking means 146 and 147. Will engage.

  The second locking means 147 is compared with other locking means 146 and 148 by arranging a plurality of locking claws 147a and locking portions 147b on the left and right as shown in FIGS. Clamping means 293 is provided to tighten the locking claw 147a after engaging with the locking portion 147b toward the locking portion 147b.

  The clamping means 293 includes a U-shaped bracket 293a fixed to the longitudinal reinforcing member 33b below the locking portion 147b, and a U-shaped inverted U-shape pivotally supported around the support shaft 293b by the bracket 293a. And a U-shaped clamp 293e that is connected to the middle of the clamp lever 293c by a connection shaft 293d and engages the upper engagement portion 147d of the locking claw 147a from above. The clamp lever 293c is provided with an operation portion 293f on its free end side.

  When the second upper unit 42b is mounted, after the locking claws 146a to 148a of the first to third locking means 146 to 148 are engaged with the locking parts 146b to 148b, the clamp 293e of the clamp means 293 is engaged. The engaging portion 147d of the pawl 147a is engaged. Then, the clamp lever 293c is rotated downward around the support shaft 293b, and the connecting shaft 293d is connected to the engaging position of the clamp 293e with the locking claw 147a and the line connecting the support shaft 293b to the longitudinal reinforcing member 33b. When the vertical engaging member 33b comes into contact with the vertical reinforcing member 33b, the engaging claw 147a of the second engaging means 147 is tightened in the engaging direction toward the engaging portion 147b. Therefore, the locking claws 147a of the second locking means 147 are more rigid than the other first and third locking means 146, 148.

  Therefore, mechanical vibration of the second upper unit 42b can be prevented as compared with the case where only the engaging portion 147d of the locking claw 147a of the second locking means 147 is engaged from above, and It is possible to reliably prevent slackening or the like due to vibration of the first to third fixing means 149 to 151 of the formula.

  The first to third fixing means 149 to 151 are arranged at three places corresponding to the upper end side (left end side) and the upper and lower ends of the side of the second upper unit 42b, as shown in FIGS. Have been. As shown in FIGS. 19, 47 and 48, the first to third fixing means 149 to 151 are provided with screw holes 149a to 151a formed in the unit reinforcing plate 143 and the door base 25 from the side of the lateral reinforcing member 32. And fixing screws 149c to 151c with operating portions 149b to 151b inserted through the screw holes 149a to 151a, thereby screwing the unit reinforcing plate 143 to the door base 25 side from the back side by screwing the fixing screws 149c to 151c into the screw holes 149a to 151a. It is designed to be tightened and fixed.

  As shown in FIG. 19, a screw insertion portion 111c is formed in the speaker mounting projection 111a on the hinge 13, 13 side on the second upper unit 42b side in the front-rear direction, and the screw insertion portion 111c is inserted from the unit reinforcing plate 143 side. A fixing screw 149c is inserted through the portion 111c. The fixing screw 149c is screwed into a screw hole 149a formed at the end of the bent portion 143a of the unit reinforcing plate 143 on the rear side of the screw insertion portion 111c.

  The first to third fixing screws 149c to 151c are inserted across the horizontal reinforcing member 32 or the vertical reinforcing member 33b and the supporting members 149d to 151d fixed to the horizontal reinforcing member 32 or the vertical reinforcing member 33b. Further, between the horizontal reinforcing member 32 or the vertical reinforcing member 33b and the supporting members 149d to 151d, there are provided locking members 149e to 151e such as snap rings. In addition, the outer circumference of the tip side of the fixing screws 149c to 151c is chamfered so as to be easily inserted into the screw holes 149a to 151a and not to be injured by a finger or the like.

  On the side of the front frame 3, as shown in FIG. 48, there is a step 3a corresponding to the operation parts 150b, 151b of the fixing screws 150c, 151c inside the outer peripheral wall 3b. When the fixing screws 150c and 151c are tightened, the stepped portion 3a can be used even when the front door 4 is closed to the front frame 3 as shown in FIG. The front door 4 can be closed to the front frame 3 side without interfering with the operation units 150b and 151b.

  However, when the front door 4 is to be closed to the front frame 3 while the fixing screws 150c and 151c are not tightened, as shown in FIG. 48 (a), the step 3a is fixed to the fixing screws 150c and 151c. Interfere with the operation units 150b and 151b, and a gap is formed between the front frame 3 and the front door 4 so that the door cannot be closed. Thus, when the second upper unit 42b is mounted, an error such as closing the front door 4 toward the front frame 3 while forgetting to fasten the fixing screws 150c and 151c of the second and third fixing means 150 and 151 is avoided. Can be prevented. The unit reinforcing plate 143 is formed integrally by punching a sheet metal material into a substantially L-shape as viewed from the front, but may be divided into a plurality of pieces.

  As shown in FIG. 28, each harness (not shown) drawn from the movable part 154 of the second upper unit 42b, the operation effecting means 232, the air blowing means 233, and the like is connected to the inner relay board 294 in the horizontal unit part 141, for example. Through the unit-side harness 295. The unit side harness 295 is drawn out to the rear side of the front door 4 through an opening 296 (FIG. 28) of the unit reinforcing plate 143 and an opening 297 (FIG. 49) formed on the rear side of the door base 25. .

  As shown in FIG. 49, on the rear side of the upper base portion 27 of the door base 25, an upper relay board 298 which is long in the left and right direction is provided adjacent to an opening 297 arranged at a substantially central portion in the left and right direction. . The upper relay board 298 is disposed in a housing recess 299 formed in a narrow portion of the upper base 27. Two board-side connectors 301 and 302 are mounted on the upper relay board 298 left and right in a rearward direction, and the connector 295a of the unit-side harness 295 is detachably connected to one of the board-side connectors 301. .

  The connector 303a of the unit relay harness 303 is detachably connected to the other board side connector 302. The unit relay harness 303 is pulled out in the left-right direction along the rear upper end of the upper base portion 27 of the door base 25 and near the upper portion of the upper speaker 30b to the end opposite to the hinges 13 and 26. After that, the door base 25 is drawn out from the opening 304 on the end side toward the front side of the door base 25.

  As shown in FIG. 18, the unit relay harness 303 pulled out from the opening 304 to the front side extends along the edge of the vertical base 28b opposite to the hinges 13 and 26 of the door base 25 near the upper side of the intermediate speaker 31b. And is connected to the lower relay board (not shown) side of the lower base portion 29 through the speaker cover 305b of the intermediate speaker 31b. Note that speaker covers 305a and 305b are arranged around the front sides of the intermediate speakers 31a and 31b.

  The unit relay harness 303 arranged vertically in front of the vertical base portion 28b of the door base 25 is covered with a protective cover 306 substantially entirely in the vertical direction as shown in FIGS. The protective cover 306 has an L-shaped cross section, is disposed along the outer peripheral wall 306a of the vertical base portion 28b, and is detachably fixed to the door base 25 with a fixing tool such as a screw.

  At the upper end of the LED board 131 in the first upper unit 42a, two board side connectors 308a and 308b are provided rearward in correspondence with the opening 307 of the door base 25, as shown in FIG. Harnesses 309a, 309b detachably connected to the board side connectors 308a, 308b are connected to the LED boards 126a, 126b on the upper speakers 30a, 30b side via the rear side of the upper base 27 of the door base 25. The two board-side connectors 308a and 308b are connected to the lower relay board and the like from the lower end via the wiring pattern of the LED board 131.

  On the rear side of the vertical base 28a on the hinges 13 and 26 side of the door base 25, a speaker relay board 310 is provided in the vicinity of the upper speaker 30a, and speaker side harnesses 311a and 311b from the upper speakers 30a and 30b are provided. The speaker relay harness 312 on the speaker drive source side is connected via the speaker relay board 310.

  The speaker relay board 310 is provided with three board side connectors 313a, 313b, 314, and the two board side connectors 313a, 313b are provided with speaker side harnesses 311a, 311b from the respective upper speakers 30a, 30b. A speaker relay harness 312 is detachably connected to one board side connector 314. As shown in FIG. 8, the speaker relay harness 312 is vertically arranged along the vertical reinforcing member 33 a attached to the vertical base 28 a on the hinge 13, 26 side of the door base 25, and the rear is provided by the protective cover 315. Protected from the side.

  The speaker relay harness 312 and the protective cover 315 are vertically arranged between the vicinity of the upper speaker 30a and the vicinity of the lower end of the lower base portion 29. The protective cover 315 has an L-shaped or U-shaped cross section that covers the speaker relay harness 312, is disposed vertically along the vertical reinforcing member 33a, and is attached to and detached from the back side of the door base 25 by a fixing tool such as a screw. It is freely fixed.

  By providing the speaker relay harness 312 behind the vertical base portion 28a on the hinges 13 and 26 side of the door base 25 in this manner, the speaker relay harness is provided regardless of the first upper unit 42a located on the front side of the vertical base portion 28a. 312 can be easily inspected.

  On the rear side of the protective cover 315, as shown in FIG. 50, an insertion preventing portion 315a for preventing insertion of an unauthorized member from between the front door 4 and the front frame 3 into the inside is formed in a rib shape. It is provided in. That is, on the hinges 13 and 26 side of the front frame 3, an outer ridge 316c and an inner ridge 316d are provided in the front wall 316b of the main body frame 316a in the vertical direction, and the back side of the front wall 316b. A reinforcing member 316e made of sheet metal is provided along the outside of the outer protrusion 316c. The reinforcing member 316e has an inner bent portion 316f bent inward from the front end.

  The vertical reinforcing member 33a on the hinges 13 and 26 side of the door base 25 includes a rear bent portion 33a1 bent rearward along the inner peripheral wall portion 317a of the door base 25, and a rear end of the rear bent portion 33a1. An outer bent portion 33a2 that is bent outward is provided over substantially the entire length in the vertical direction.

  Then, between the front door 4 and the front frame 3, when the front door 4 is closed to the front frame 3 side around the hinges 13 and 26, the outer bent portion 33a2 of the front door 4 and the inner peripheral wall portion 317a are connected. The inside bent portion 316f of the reinforcing member 316e enters between them to form a bent maze 318 for preventing insertion of an unauthorized member. An outer peripheral wall 317c is provided outside the inner peripheral wall 317a via a rear inclined wall 317b, and the rear end of the light-emitting decorative cover 132 contacts the front end of the outer peripheral wall 317c.

  The rear wall portion 315b of the protective cover 315 is equal to the outer bent portion 33a2 of the vertical reinforcing member 33a or projects rearward from the outer bent portion 33a2, and the insertion preventing portion 315a that projects rearward from the rear wall portion 315b is The speakers are arranged vertically in the entire range from the vicinity of the upper speakers 30a and 30b to the vicinity of the lower end of the lower base portion 29. The insertion preventing portion 315a has a rib shape, and is arranged to approach the inside of the inner ridge 316d of the front frame 3 when the front door 4 is closed to the front frame 3 side. The mounting portion 315c of the protective cover 315 is mounted to the door base 25 by a fixing tool such as a screw.

  By providing the rib-shaped insertion preventing portion 315a projecting rearward from the rear wall portion 315b of the protective cover 315 inside the longitudinal reinforcing member 33a in this manner, an illicit member is temporarily inserted through the bent maze 318. Even if this occurs, the insertion preventing portion 315a and the inner protrusion 316d can prevent further entry of an unauthorized member. Further, since the insertion preventing portion 315a is provided on the protective cover 315, it is possible to easily implement the structure without having to largely change the structure and the like on the front door 4 side.

  As shown in FIG. 6, FIG. 7, FIG. 19, FIG. 22, etc., upper speakers 30a, 30b, harnesses 295, 309a, 309b, 311a, 311b and a relay board 310 for the speaker are provided on the upper base portion 27 of the door base 25. A pair of left and right upper back covers 319a and 319b for covering part or all of the rear side from the back side are provided detachably. The upper back cover 319a on the hinges 13 and 26 side is provided with a notch 319a1 corresponding to the first fixing means 149 so that the operation part 149b of the fixing screw 149c of the first fixing means 149 can be operated from the back side. I have. The upper back cover 319 b opposite to the hinges 13 and 26 is provided between the board side connector 302 of the upper relay board 298 and the clamp means 293 so that the clamp means 293 can be operated.

  By providing the upper back covers 319a and 319b as described above, the doors of the front door 4 are compared with the case where the upper speakers 30a and 30b, the harnesses 295, 309a, 309b, 311a and 311b, and the speaker relay board 310 are exposed. The appearance of the upper portion on the back side of the base 25 can be improved.

  On the other hand, a substantially central portion of the upper base 27 in the left-right direction, that is, an opening 297 formed in the upper base 27 and a unit side harness 295 drawn out from the opening 297 are connected to the upper relay substrate 298 side. The upper back covers 319a and 319b are not provided in a portion corresponding to the connector 301. Therefore, the connector 295a of the unit side harness 295 can be easily attached to and detached from the board side connector 301 of the upper relay board 298. At the same time, the fixing screw 149c of the first fixing means 149 and the clamping means 293 can be operated regardless of the upper back covers 319a and 319b. Therefore, each time the second upper unit 42b is attached or detached, the trouble of attaching and detaching the upper back covers 319a and 319b can be eliminated.

  Although the upper and lower back covers 319a and 319b are detachably attached to the left and right separately, the left and right upper back covers 319a and 319b can be connected and integrated. However, in this case, when attaching / detaching the second upper unit 42b, the unit-side harness 295 is connected to the board-side connector 301 of the upper relay board 298 after removing the left and right integrated upper back covers 319a and 319b. It is necessary to attach and detach.

  As shown in FIGS. 51 and 52, the game board 15 includes a base plate 321 such as a veneer board, and a guide rail 322 for guiding a game ball fired from the firing means 16 is provided in front of the base plate 321 in an annular shape. At the same time, a number of game nails (not shown) are arranged in the game area 15a inside the guide rail 322, in addition to the unit components such as the central display frame unit 323, the start winning unit 324, the normal winning unit 325, and the like. Further, for example, a game information display means 326 is arranged in a lower portion outside the game area 15a. On the rear side of the game board 15, a liquid crystal display means 327 and a board movable effect means 328 are arranged, and mounted on a back mounting base 329 (FIGS. 54 to 57) fixed to the back of the game board 15. I have. Note that a transparent plate made of a synthetic resin may be used as the base plate 321.

  The base plate 321 is formed, for example, in a substantially rectangular shape in a front view, and as shown in FIG. 52, one or more (here, three) for mounting a central display frame unit 323, a start winning unit 324, and a normal winning unit 325. The mounting holes 330a to 330c are formed to penetrate in the plate thickness direction. A plurality of, for example, three first to third rail members 331 to 333 constituting the guide rail 322 are mounted on the front side of the base plate 321.

  The first rail member 331 is formed in a substantially arcuate shape extending from the lower left side of the base plate 321 to the left edge portion substantially the center, the upper edge portion substantially the center, to the upper right portion, and a front wall portion 334 parallel to the base plate 321. A substantially constant width peripheral wall portion 335 protruding rearward along the outer periphery of the front wall portion 334 is integrally provided, and the rear end side of the peripheral wall portion 335 is in contact with the front surface of the base plate 321. It is detachably fixed to the base plate 321. In the first rail member 331, of the peripheral wall portion 335, the inner peripheral wall portion 335a on the game area 15a side is formed in a substantially arc shape in a front view, and forms a part of the guide rail 322.

  The second rail member 332 is formed in the shape of a thin plate having a constant width in the front-rear direction that stands substantially vertically on the front side of the base plate 321, and extends parallel to the inside of the first rail member 331 from the upper left to the lower left of the base plate 321. They are arranged in a substantially circular arc shape. The portion sandwiched between the first rail member 331 and the second rail member 332 forms a launch guide passage 336 that guides the game ball launched by the launch means 16 to the game area 15a. At a downstream end of the launch guide passage 336, a return prevention valve 337 for preventing return of game balls from the game area 15a to the launch guide passage 336 is provided.

  The third rail member 333 is connected to the right edge and the lower edge of the base plate 321 so as to connect the upper right end of the first rail member 331 and the lower left end of the second rail member 332. A front wall 338 parallel to the base plate 321 and a substantially constant width peripheral wall 339 projecting rearward from the peripheral edge of the front wall 338 are formed integrally. The peripheral wall 339 is detachably fixed to the base plate 321 in a state where the rear end side of the peripheral wall portion 339 is in contact with the front surface of the base plate 321. In the third rail member 333, of the peripheral wall portion 339, the inner peripheral wall portion 339a on the game area 15a side forms a part of the guide rail 322.

  The central display frame unit 323 is disposed along the outer periphery of the mounting hole 330a formed in the base plate 321 to form an opening window 340 for visually recognizing the liquid crystal display means 327 and the board movable effect means 328. It is composed of, for example, four constituent members 323a to 323d of left, right, up and down, and is detachably attached to the base plate 321 from the front side. The game ball that has flowed from the launch guide passage 336 into the game area 15a through the return prevention valve 337 flows down one of the left flow path 341 on the left and the right flow path 342 on the right in the game area 15a. It has become.

  The left component member 323a constitutes at least the upstream portion of the left downflow path 341. As shown in FIG. 51, the left component member 323a guides the position of the return prevention valve 337 from the upper left to the left center of the game area 15a. It is arranged along the rail 322. The left component member 323a includes a left inflow portion 341a that forms the entrance of the left downflow path 341 at the upper end, and a left outflow section 341b that discharges the game ball downstream of the left downflow path 341 at the lower end. A plurality of obstacles 343 each having a forwardly projecting shape are provided in the passage portion therebetween. It is desirable that at least a part of the left component member 323a is formed to be transparent so that the rear liquid crystal display means 327 and the board movable effect means 328 can be visually recognized from the front side.

  The right component member 323b constitutes at least the upstream portion of the right downflow path 342, and is arranged along the guide rail 322 from the upper right portion to the lower right portion of the game area 15a, as shown in FIG. Is provided with a right inflow section 342a corresponding to an entrance of the right downflow path 342, and at the downstream side of the right inflow section 342a, a normal symbol starting means 344, a second special symbol starting means 346, a big winning means 347, a normal winning means. 348 and the like are arranged. It is preferable that at least a part of the right component member 323b is formed to be transparent so that the rear liquid crystal display means 327 and the board movable effect means 328 can be visually recognized from the front side.

  The upper component member 323c is arranged along the guide rail 322 so as to connect the upper ends of the left component member 323a and the right component member 323b to the left and right, and as shown in FIGS. There is provided a right guide passage 351 for guiding the game ball flowing from the 336 through the return prevention valve 337 to the upper side of the game area 15a to the right downflow path 342.

  The right guide passage 351 is provided with an inflow port 351a provided on the left end side of the upper component member 323c, a vertical passage section 351b provided substantially downward from the inflow port 351a, and a lower right side from a lower end side of the vertical passage section 351b. A horizontal passage portion 351c provided in an inclined shape and an outlet 351d provided on the right end side of the horizontal passage portion 351c. For example, the horizontal passage portion 351c is longer than the vertical passage portion 351b in front view. It is formed in an L shape. A return rubber 352 is disposed on the upstream end side of the right guide passage 351.

  The inflow port 351a is arranged between the inflow portion (the position where the anti-return valve 337 is disposed) of the game area 15a and the uppermost portion of the guide rail 322, and opens substantially upward toward the guide rail 322. The left inflow portion 341a on the left component member 323a side is arranged between the inflow portion of the game area 15a and the inflow port 351a. The return rubber 352 is disposed on the upper right of the inflow port 351a with the collision surface 352a of the game ball directed obliquely downward and leftward, for example, and fixed to the upper component member 323c, for example. The outlet 351d communicates with the right inflow portion 342a on the right component 323b side, for example, near the guide rail 322. When the game ball fired by the firing means 16 and passed through the return prevention valve 337 and flowed into the game area 15a reaches the return rubber 352 along the guide rail 322, most of the ball flows into the inflow port 351a. Flows down the right flow path 342 via the right guide passage 351, but otherwise flows into the left inflow section 341a and flows down the left flow path 341.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the right guide passage 351 is disposed apart from the guide rail 322 corresponding to the predetermined range on the upper side of the guide rail 322, so that the right guide passage 351 is located on the upper side (predetermined location) of the game area 15a. The non-inflow area 353 into which the game ball cannot flow is formed in an inward (downward) concave shape. In other words, the right guide passage 351 is disposed along the edge so as to avoid the non-inflow area 353. A closing plate 354 that fills the non-inflow area 353 is provided integrally with the right guide passage 351 in the upper component member 323c. On the front side of the non-inflow area 353, the frame non-movable body 203 on the front frame 3 side is disposed with the transparent plate 36a on the front door 4 side interposed therebetween. It is preferable that at least the right guide passage 351 of the upper component member 323c is formed to be transparent, so that the rear liquid crystal display means 327 and the movable panel effect means 328 can be visually recognized from the front side.

  The lower component member 323d is disposed so as to connect the lower ends of the left component member 323a and the right component member 323b at a position separated from the guide rail 322. A stage 355 that drops forward from either the falling part 355a or the other part, a warp entrance 356 into which game balls flowing down the left flow path 341 can flow, and a game ball that flows into the warp entrance 356, for example. And a stage guide passage 357 for guiding to 355. Note that it is preferable that at least a part of the lower component member 323d is formed to be transparent so that the rear liquid crystal display means 327 and the board movable effect means 328 can be visually recognized from the front side.

  The start winning unit 324 is disposed below the center display frame unit 323 along the guide rail 322, and is detachably attached from the front to an attachment hole 330 b formed in the base plate 321. In the start winning unit 324, a first special symbol starting means 345, an out port 358 and the like are arranged.

  The normal winning unit 325 is disposed below the center display frame unit 323 and on the left side of the starting winning unit 324 along the guide rail 322, and is detachably attached to a mounting hole 330c formed in the base plate 321 from the front side. Have been. In the normal winning unit 325, for example, a plurality (two in this case) of normal winning means 349 and 350 are arranged.

  In the present embodiment, an example is shown in which one out port 358 is arranged at the most downstream portion of the game area 15a (in the present embodiment, at the lower center of the game area 15a), but in addition to the most downstream portion of the game area 15a. One or more outlets may be arranged at other positions. In this case, the arrangement position of the out mouth is arbitrary, and may be provided in, for example, the normal winning unit 325 in which the normal winning means 349 and 350 are arranged, or the unit in which the large winning means 347 is arranged (in the present embodiment, the center is located in the center). It may be provided on the right component member 323b) of the display frame unit 323.

  As shown in FIG. 53, the game information display means 326 includes four LED groups each including, for example, eight LEDs 360, and a total of 32 LEDs 360 are provided with the normal symbol display means 361 and the normal reserved number display means. 362, first special symbol display means 363, second special symbol display means 364, first special reserved number display means 365, second special reserved number display means 366, variation reduction notification means 367, right strike notification means 368, and the number of rounds A predetermined number is assigned to the notification means 369. That is, the eight LEDs 360 belonging to the first and second LED groups 326a and 326b constitute first and second special symbol display means 363 and 364, respectively, and the eight LEDs 360 belonging to the third LED group 326c are two. The first special reserved number display means 365, the second special reserved number display means 366, the ordinary reserved number display means 362, and the fluctuation shortening notification means 367 are constituted respectively, and eight LEDs 360 belonging to the fourth LED group 326d are formed. , Two of them constitute ordinary symbol display means 361, the other two constitute right-hand informing means 368, and the remaining four constitute round number informing means 369.

  The ordinary symbol starting means 344 is for starting the variation display of the ordinary symbol by the ordinary symbol display means 361, and is constituted by a passage gate or the like through which a game ball can pass, and a passage detecting means 344a for detecting the passage of the game ball. It has. The normal symbol starting means 344 is provided, for example, downstream of the right inflow portion 342a in the right component 323b of the central display frame unit 323, and is capable of passing game balls flowing down the right flow path 342.

  The normal symbol display means 361 is for changing and displaying the normal symbol, and is constituted by, for example, two LEDs 360 in the game information display means 326 (FIG. 53), and the normal symbol start means 344 detects a game ball. Based on this, after the two LEDs 360 constituting the normal symbol emit light in the normal fluctuation light emission pattern, the hit determination random number value included in the ordinary random number information acquired at the time of detecting the game ball by the ordinary symbol starting means 344 is changed to The fluctuation is stopped in the hit mode (predetermined mode) when the predetermined value matches the predetermined hit determination value, and the variation is stopped in the out mode in other cases. Note that the two LEDs 360 constituting a normal symbol can display one or a plurality of winning modes and one or a plurality of off modes by a combination of their light-emitting modes (for example, lighting / extinguishing). The light emission pattern switches, for example, a plurality of (two in this case) light emission modes at predetermined time intervals (for example, 128 ms).

  When the ordinary symbol starting means 344 detects a game ball during the ordinary holding period including the symbol change of the ordinary symbol display means 361 and the ordinary profit state, the ordinary random number information acquired thereby is determined in advance. The upper limit of the reserved number, for example, four, is retained and stored, and each time the ordinary suspension period ends, one by one is digested to change the ordinary symbol. The stored number of ordinary random number information (ordinary reserved number) is notified to the player by the ordinary reserved number display means 362 or the like. The ordinary reserved number display means 362 is constituted by, for example, two LEDs 360 in the game information display means 326 (FIG. 53), and is determined by the combination of the respective light emission modes (for example, lighting / flashing / lighting out) of the two LEDs 360. , 0 to 4, five types of ordinary reserve numbers can be displayed.

  The first special symbol starting means (symbol starting means) 345 is for starting a symbol change by the first special symbol displaying means 363, and is constituted by a non-opening / closing type prize means having no opening / closing means. (Start-up winning detection means) 345a for detecting the prize. The first special symbol starting means 345 is provided, for example, in the starting winning unit 324, and is disposed in an upward opening shape below the center falling portion 355a of the stage 355 so as to correspond to the center falling portion 355a. Due to the existence of a route that wins through the stage 355 from the entrance 356, for example, a game ball flowing down the left flow path 341 can win with a higher probability than a game ball flowing down the right flow path 342. I have. When a game ball wins in the first special symbol starting means 345, a predetermined number of game balls are awarded per winning.

  The second special symbol starting means (symbol starting means) 346 is for starting the symbol change by the second special symbol displaying means 364, and the opening and closing of the game ball can be won by the operation of the opening / closing section 346b. (Or more difficult to win than the open state) is constituted by openable and closable winning means which can be changed to a closed state, provided with a winning detecting means (starting winning detecting means) 346a for detecting a winning game ball, and a normal symbol display The opening / closing section 346b is changed from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time when the stop symbol after the change of the means 361 becomes a hit state and a normal profit state occurs.

  The second special symbol starting means 346 is provided, for example, on the right component member 323b of the central display frame unit 323 on the downstream side of the ordinary symbol starting means 344, so that a game ball flowing down the right flowing path 342 can win. Has become. When a game ball wins in the second special symbol starting means 346, a predetermined number of game balls are awarded per winning.

  The first special symbol display means (symbol display means) 363 is composed of, for example, eight LEDs 360 in the game information display means 326 (FIG. 53), and detects that the first special symbol start means 345 detects a game ball. Under the condition (when the symbol starting condition is satisfied), after the eight LEDs 360 constituting the first special symbol emit light in the special-changing light emission pattern, they are acquired when the first special symbol starting means 345 detects a game ball. In the case where the jackpot determination random number value included in the first special random number information matches the predetermined jackpot determination value (when a random number lottery is won), the first jackpot mode (specific mode) is used. Is configured to stop the fluctuation in the first off mode (non-specific mode). If the stopped symbol after the change of the first special symbol display means 363 becomes the first big hit mode, the first special profit state occurs.

  The second special symbol display means (symbol display means) 364 is composed of, for example, eight LEDs 360 in the game information display means 326 (FIG. 53), and detects that the second special symbol start means 346 detects a game ball. Under the condition (when the symbol starting condition is satisfied), after the eight LEDs 360 constituting the second special symbol emit light in the special changing light emission pattern, the information is acquired when the second special symbol starting means 346 detects a game ball. When the jackpot determination random number value included in the second special random number information matches a predetermined jackpot determination value (when the random number lottery is won), the second jackpot mode (specific mode) is used. Is configured to stop the fluctuation in the second off mode (non-specific mode). If the stopped symbol after the change of the second special symbol display means 364 becomes the second big hit mode, the second special profit state occurs.

  The first and second special symbol display means 363 and 364 are provided with one or a plurality of first and second jackpot modes and one or a plurality of first and second jackpot modes in accordance with a combination of light emission modes (for example, on / off) of the eight LEDs 360. The second deviation mode can be displayed, and the special-fluctuation light emission pattern switches, for example, a plurality of (two in this case) specific light emission modes at predetermined time intervals (for example, 128 ms).

  Also, during the special change period of the first special symbol display means 363, during the change of the symbol of the second special symbol display means 364, and during the first and second special profit states, the first and second special symbols are started. When the means 345, 346 detects a game ball, the first and second special random number information (random number information) obtained thereby are stored in a predetermined upper limit, for example, up to a maximum of 4 pieces each. Is done. If the number of the reserved memories on the second special symbol side is one or more at the end of the special reserved period, one reserved memory of the second special symbol is digested to change the second special symbol, and the first special symbol is changed. When only the special symbol side reserved memory is one or more, one reserved memory of the first special symbol is digested to change the first special symbol. As described above, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not both changing, and when there is a hold memory on both the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side. Is designed to preferentially change the second special symbol.

  The number of stored first and second special random number information (first and second special reserved number) is notified to the player by the first and second special reserved number display means 365 and 366, the liquid crystal display means 327, and the like. You. Here, the first and second special reserved number display means 365 and 366 are each constituted by two LEDs 360 in the game information display means 326 (FIG. 53), and their light emission modes (for example, lighting / flashing / lighting out) are provided. Depending on the combination, five types of first and second special reserved numbers of 0 to 4 can be displayed.

  The large prize winning means 347 is an opening / closing prize means provided with an opening / closing plate 347b capable of switching between an open state in which a game ball can win and a closed state in which a prize cannot be won. For example, it is arranged on the right component member 323b of the central display frame unit 323 on the downstream side of the second special symbol starting means 346 and on the upstream side of the first special symbol starting means 345, and has flowed down the left flowing path 341. A game ball flowing down the right flow path 342 can win a prize with a higher probability than a game ball. The special winning means 347 is a first and second special symbol which is generated when the first and second special symbols of the first and second special symbol display means 363 and 364 are stopped in the first and second big hit modes after the change. In the profit state, the opening / closing plate 347b is opened forward according to one of one or a plurality of types of opening patterns, so that the game balls falling thereon can win inside. When a game ball wins in the special winning means 347, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as a prize ball per winning. In the following description, the first special profit state and the second special profit state are collectively referred to as "big hit game" (special game).

  In the present embodiment, for example, three types of open patterns of 4R, 6R, and 10R are provided as open patterns of the big winning means 347 in the big hit game. Each of the open patterns 4R, 6R, and 10R is configured to perform so-called rounds with balls four, six, and ten times, respectively. Here, the round with a payout is performed when the number of winnings in the special winning means 347 reaches a predetermined number (for example, nine) or a predetermined time (for example, 28 seconds) elapses after the opening of the special winning means 347. The large prize winning means 347 is set to be closed, and if the player hits the right prize winning means 347 on the right downflow path 342 side and hits right, the maximum number of game balls can be easily won and a large number of prize balls can be obtained. Can be acquired. In addition, in addition to the round with a ball, there may be provided an opening pattern having a round without a ball in which the special winning means 347 opens for an extremely short time (for example, 0.2 seconds), or a round without a ball. Only an open pattern may be provided.

  In the present embodiment, a special game state advantageous to the player can be generated after the end of the jackpot game, in accordance with the jackpot symbol random number value in the case of the jackpot. The special game state is a combination of the high probability state and the extended open state, for example, a "latent state" in which the high probability state occurs and the open extended state does not occur, and the "probable state" in which both the high probability state and the extended open state occur. There are three types of "state" and "time saving state" in which a high probability state does not occur and an extended open state occurs. Note that a state in which neither the high probability state nor the extended open state occurs is the normal game state.

  During the high-probability state, by increasing the number of jackpot determination values compared to the other low-probability states, the probability that the first and second special symbols are in the jackpot mode is set to a high probability. .

  Also, during the open extension state, the opening / closing pattern of the second special symbol starting means 346 is switched from a normal opening / closing pattern (for example, 0.2 seconds × 1 opening) to an extended opening / closing pattern (for example, 2 seconds × 3 opening). In addition, for the first and second special symbols, the variation time of the first and second special symbol display means is respectively switched to the shortened variation time shorter than the normal variation time, and for the ordinary symbol, the winning probability is changed to the normal probability. (For example, 1/10) to a high probability (for example, 1 / 1.3), and the fluctuation time can be switched from a normal fluctuation time (for example, 27 seconds) to a shortened fluctuation time (for example, 2.7 seconds). I have.

  In the present embodiment, it is assumed that one of the probability change state and the time saving state occurs with a predetermined probability after the end of the big hit game. For example, the probable change state ends when the next big hit occurs, and the probable change state ends when the first and second special symbols fluctuate a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) or until the next big hit occurs. I do. Note that the probable change state may also be configured to end when the first and second special symbols have changed a predetermined number of times before the next big hit occurs.

  The normal prize means 348 to 350 are non-opening / closing prize means having no opening / closing means and include prize detection means 348a to 350a for detecting a winning game ball. The normal prize unit 325, the central display frame unit 323, and the like are provided. Are located. When a game ball wins in the normal winning means 348 to 350, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as a prize ball per winning.

  The out port 358 allows the game ball that has flowed down the game area 15a without winning any of the prize means such as the first and second special symbol starting means 345 and 346 from the game area 15a to the rear side of the game board 15, for example. For example, it is formed on the guide rail 322 below the first special symbol starting means 345 in a downwardly inclined shape that penetrates the base plate 321 back and forth. Note that a plurality of out ports 358 may be provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 54 to 57, a liquid crystal display means 327 and a board movable effect means 328 are mounted on the back side of the base plate 321 via a back mounting base 329. The back mounting base 329 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open front side, and a rectangular opening 329b is formed in a back wall 329a. The liquid crystal display means 327 connects the display screen 327a to the opening 329b. In a corresponding state, it is detachably fixed to the back side of the back wall 329a.

  As shown in FIG. 51, the effect symbol 370 can be variably displayed on the liquid crystal display means 327 in parallel with, for example, the first and second special symbol display means 363 and 364 in which the first and second special symbols are variably displayed. In addition, various images such as the first and second reserved images X1 to X4, Y1 to Y4, and the fluctuating reserved image Z indicating the first and second special reserved numbers can be displayed.

  Here, the effect symbol 370 includes a plurality (three in this case) of symbol arrays composed of a number of symbols and other symbols, and each symbol constituting each symbol column is, for example, 1 to 8 or the like. The symbol main body 370a is composed of a numeral and other characters, and a character or other decorative part 370b attached to the symbol main body 370a. The effect symbol 370 starts changing by vertical scrolling or the like for each symbol row according to a predetermined changing pattern substantially simultaneously with the start of the change of the first and second special symbols, for example. For example, the final stop is performed substantially simultaneously with the stop of the change of the first and second special symbols, for example. In the effect symbol 370, for example, the case where all the stop symbols on the activated line are the same is the jackpot effect mode, and the other is the off effect mode. The first and second special symbols are the first and second jackpot modes ( The effect symbol 370 is a jackpot effect mode (specific effect mode) when the specific symbol is the specific symbol, and the effect symbol 370 is the effect symbol 370 when the first and second special symbols are the first and the second deviating modes (the non-specific mode). Is a departure effect mode (non-specific effect mode).

  In addition, regarding the first and second reserved images X1 to X4, Y1 to Y4, and the fluctuating reserved image Z, the first and second special symbol starting means 345 and 346 detect the first and second reserved images based on the detection of the game ball. When the number 2 of special reserved images increases, one additional first and second reserved images X1 and Y1 are displayed on the liquid crystal display means 327, and the first and second reserved image display means 363 and 364 When the first and second special reserved numbers decrease based on the start of a new variation of the first and second special symbols, for example, the suspended image Z during the change is deleted and the first and second reserved images X1 to X1 are deleted. , Y1 are shifted one by one toward the front side (for example, the right side of the screen) of the queue, and the first and second reserved images X1, Y1 that are pushed out are moved to, for example, predetermined positions to generate new fluctuations. The image is changed to the middle reserved image Z.

  As shown in FIG. 54 to FIG. 58, the board movable staging means 328 includes a pair of left and right elevation drive units 373 and 373 that drive the board movable body 371 in the vertical direction via the board movable body 371 and the board movable body base 372. And

  The panel movable body base 372 is, for example, a symmetrical horizontally long substantially plate-like shape, and is disposed substantially in front of the liquid crystal display means 327 in parallel with the display screen 327a. It is connected to the lifting slider 375 on the 373 side.

  The board movable body 371 is, for example, flat on the front and back, and is pivotally attached to the front side of the board movable body base 372 via a left-right hinge pin 376 arranged on the lower rear side, so that it can move along the front surface of the board movable body base 372. It is configured to be swingable between an upright state (shown by a solid line in FIG. 56) and an inclined state (shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 57) in which it is inclined a predetermined angle forward with respect to the upright state. For example, the first decorative portion 377a disposed at the center in the left-right direction and the second decorative portions 377b disposed on both left and right sides of the first decorative portion 377a have a predetermined three-dimensional shape.

  The board movable body 371 is moved up to the upper limit position by the elevation drive unit 373, and when it has a specific relative positional relationship with the frame movable body 156, as shown in FIGS. 61 (b1) and (b2). 156 to visually form a specific form (here, a designed “butterfly”). For example, the first decorative portion 377a having a rectangular shape in a front view includes a butterfly body (or a rear body). The second decorative portion 377b of the board that extends to the left and right of the first decorative portion 377a of the board corresponds to the rear wing of the butterfly.

  As shown in FIGS. 54, 58 and the like, the panel movable body 371 includes a decorative base 378 constituting the back side, a light emitting decorative cover 379 mounted on the front side of the decorative base 378, and a pair of left and right guide rollers 380. , An LED board 381 disposed on the rear side of the light-emitting decoration cover 379. The decorative base 378 is, for example, non-translucent, and has a hinge pin 376 disposed on the lower rear side thereof. The light-emitting decorative cover 379 is made of a colorless and transparent or colored and transparent synthetic resin, and has an irregularly-reflected portion having an uneven shape on the inner surface on the back side.

  The LED substrate 381 is arranged, for example, in a range corresponding to the second decorative portion 377b of the board, and a plurality of, for example, two types of LEDs (second light emitters) 381a, 381b are arranged on the front side thereof. The LEDs 381a are arranged at substantially equal intervals at positions corresponding to the outer periphery of a “butterfly” formed by the frame movable body 156 and the panel movable body 371, and can emit light of a single color such as white. The LEDs 381b are, for example, substantially uniformly distributed in an inner region of a "butterfly", and are capable of emitting light of, for example, multiple colors. Note that the LED 381a and the LED 381b may be of the same type.

  The pair of left and right guide rollers 380 are disposed, for example, above the hinge pin 376, and extend around the left and right axes around the distal end of a roller support portion 382 projecting outward from both left and right ends of the movable platen 371. It is supported in a rotatable state.

  The left and right elevating drive units 373 are disposed on the left and right sides in front of the liquid crystal display means 327, and are connected to the panel movable body base 372 as shown in FIGS. 54, 55, 59, 60 and the like. An elevating guide 383 that guides the elevating slider 375 in the vertical direction between the upper limit position and the lower limit position, an upper limit position holding unit 384 that holds the elevating guide 383 at the upper limit position, and a member disposed near one end of the elevating guide 383. The driving pulley 385, a driven pulley 386 disposed near the other end of the lifting guide 383, a driving means 387 such as a stepping motor for rotating the driving pulley 385, and the driving pulley 385 and the driven pulley 386. Further, an endless belt 388 to which the elevating slider 375 is fixed at a predetermined position on the circumference thereof, A biasing spring 389, an elevating / lowering restricting means 390 that releasably restricts the elevating slider 375 at the lower limit position, and a swing guide 391 that guides the board movable body 371 in the swing direction via a guide roller 380 of the board movable body 371. And a lifting base 392 that supports the lifting guide 383, the driving pulley 385, the driven pulley 386, the driving means 387, and the like.

  The elevating base 392 is arranged vertically, for example, along the left and right edges of the liquid crystal display means 327, and is detachably fixed to, for example, the front side of the back wall 329a of the back mounting base 329. The lifting base 392 is provided with bulging portions 393 and 394 bulging forward at the upper end and the lower end, respectively.

  The elevating guide 383 has, for example, an elongated cylindrical shape, and is vertically arranged between the upper swelling portion 393 and the lower swelling portion 394 at the front side of the elevating base 392, and the elevating slider 375 is moved by the elevating guide 383. , Slidably supported between an upper limit position and a lower limit position. The upper limit position holding means 384 is composed of a magnet 395 disposed on, for example, the upper bulging portion 393 on the lifting base 392 side, and a magnet attracting metal plate 396 disposed on the lifting slider 375 side corresponding to the magnet 395. When the elevating slider 375 reaches the upper limit position, the magnet 395 attracts the magnet attracting sheet metal 396 to hold the elevating slider 375 at the upper limit position. Of course, the magnet 395 may be disposed on the lifting slider 375 side and the magnet attraction plate 396 may be disposed on the lifting base 392 side, or the upper limit position holding means 384 may be constituted by a pair of magnets.

  A driving pulley 385 is disposed near the upper end of the lifting guide 383, and a driven pulley 386 is disposed near the lower end thereof. For example, the driving pulley 385 is mounted on a lifting base 392 and is rotatable around a longitudinal axis. And the base cover 397. The driving unit 387 is mounted, for example, on the front side of the upper bulging portion 393, and the driving gear 398 mounted on the driving shaft 387 a meshes with the gear 385 a of the driving pulley 385. By operating the driving means 387 in the forward and reverse directions, the movable platen base 372 and the movable platen 371 can be raised and lowered between the lower limit position and the upper limit position via the belt 388 and the lifting slider 375. In the present embodiment, the lower limit position of the panel movable body 371 is the origin position.

  The spring 389 is an elongated coil spring, for example, disposed near the elevating guide 383. One end of the spring 389 is fixed to, for example, a lower end of the elevating base 392, and the other end is fixed to, for example, an upper side of the elevating slider 375. The intermediate portion is arranged in an inverted U-shape in front view by being wound around, for example, a pulley 399 arranged on the upper end side of the elevating base 392, and biases the panel movable body 371 in the ascending direction via the elevating slider 375. ing.

  Further, on the elevating base 392, a panel movable body position detecting means 400 including a photo sensor for detecting the operating position of the panel movable body 371 is arranged. In the present embodiment, two board movable body position detecting means 400, that is, an origin position detecting means 400a and an upper limit position detecting means 400b, are provided. When the movable board 371 is at the origin position (lower limit position), the origin position is detected. When the means 400a is at the upper limit position of the board movable body 371, the upper limit position detecting means 400b detects, for example, a non-detecting portion 375a provided on the elevating slider 375, for example.

  The swing guide 391 is formed in a groove shape in which the guide roller 380 on the side of the board movable body 371 is slidably engaged. For example, the swing guide 391 is arranged substantially vertically on the side surface of the guide member 401 mounted on the front side of the base cover 397. Are located. Here, the elevating guide 383 for guiding the movable platen base 372 is arranged straight in the up-down direction, whereas the swing guide 391 for guiding the guide roller 380 on the movable platen 371 side has a bent portion in the front-rear direction. have.

  That is, the swing guide 391 of the present embodiment includes, for example, a bent portion 391a at a predetermined location on the upper side, an inclined guide portion 391b formed such that the upper end side is inclined forward and the lower end side is a lift guide. The non-inclined guide portion 391c is formed in parallel with the 383. The front and rear positions of the non-inclined guide portion 391c correspond to the positions of the guide rollers 380 in a state where the movable platen 371 faces directly in front. As a result, when the movable platen 371 rises from the origin position, while the guide roller 380 is sliding on the non-inclined guide portion 391c, the movable platen 371 is maintained in a state of facing directly in front of the guide roller 380. When the roller 380 passes through the bent portion 391a and enters the inclined guide portion 391b, the movable platen 371 continues to ascend on the lower side where the hinge pin 376 is provided, while the guide roller 380 is moved. The provided upper side moves forward along the inclined guide portion 391b. As a result, the movable platen 371 gradually starts to lean forward shortly before reaching the upper limit position. When the movable platen 371 reaches the upper limit position, the inclination angle becomes substantially the same as the inclination angle of the frame movable member 156 ( (FIG. 57).

  The lifting / lowering restricting means 390 includes a restricting member 402 that can be changed to a restricting position that restricts the upward movement of the lifting slider 375 at the origin position (lower limit position), a restriction releasing position that does not restrict the lifting, and a lifting and lowering device that drives the restricting member 402. A regulating drive unit 403 and a link member 404 for transmitting the driving force of the elevation regulating drive unit 403 to the regulating member 402 are provided, for example, on the lower front side of the base cover 397 corresponding to the vicinity of the elevation slider 375 at the origin position. Have been.

  The regulating member 402 is swingable between a regulating position and a regulation releasing position, for example, around a rotation shaft 402a in the front-rear direction, and the regulating arm 402b and the urging arm 402c are radially moved with respect to the rotation shaft 402a. In the restricting position, the restricting arm portion 402b engages with the restricted portion 405 on the side of the elevating slider 375 from above to prevent the elevating slider 375 from moving upward, and rotates clockwise from the restricting position, for example. At the restriction release position, the engagement with the restricted portion 405 is released, and the lifting slider 375 is allowed to move upward. The regulating member 402 is elastically urged counterclockwise, that is, toward the regulating position by a spring 406 disposed between the urging arm 402c and the base cover 397.

  The link member 404 is swingable about a rotation shaft 404a in the front-rear direction, for example, below the regulating member 402, and one end of the link member 404 is connected to the regulating member 402 with the connecting pin 402d on the regulating arm 402b sandwiching the rotating shaft 404a. , And the other end is connected to a drive shaft 403a of a lifting / lowering drive unit 403 made of an electromagnetic solenoid or the like. The lifting / lowering drive unit 403 is disposed, for example, below the control member 402 and the link member 404, and on the front side of the base cover 397 with the drive shaft 403a directed, for example, in the left-right direction.

  When the board movable body 371 is at the origin position (FIGS. 61 (a1) and (a2)), the regulating member 402 of the elevation regulating means 390 is held at the regulating position by the bias of the spring 406, and the regulating arm 402b is moved up and down by the lifting slider. Since the plate 375 is engaged with the regulated portion 405 from above (FIG. 60 (b)), the movable platen 371 is securely held at its original position. Thus, it is possible to reliably prevent the movable plate 371 from being displaced from the origin position due to, for example, the urging force of the spring 389.

  When moving the board movable body 371 from the origin position to the upper limit position, first, the control member 402 of the elevation control means 390 is switched to the restriction release position. That is, by operating the lifting / lowering drive unit 403, the link member 404 is rotated counterclockwise around the rotation shaft 404 a, whereby the restriction member 402 is rotated clockwise against the urging force of the spring 406. As a result, the regulating arm 402b is disengaged from the regulated portion 405 of the lifting slider 375, and the lifting slider 375 can move upward.

  Subsequently, the driving means 387 is operated in the forward direction. As a result, the belt 388 rotates, and the elevating slider 375 moves up along the elevating guide 383, whereby the board movable body base 372 and the board movable body 371 on the front side thereof rise. After the start of the upward movement, the board movable body 371 maintains the forward-facing state without tilting back and forth until the guide roller 380 reaches the bent portion 391a of the swing guide 391, but the guide roller 380 is bent by the swing guide 391. When entering the inclined guide portion 391b beyond the portion 391a, the movable platen 371 is gradually inclined forward, and the inclination becomes maximum when it reaches the upper limit position. Note that the inclination of the panel movable body 371 at this time is substantially the same as the inclination of the frame movable body 156.

  When the board movable body 371 reaches the upper limit position (board side specific position) (FIGS. 61 (b1) and (b2)), the board movable body 371 and the frame movable body 156 are separated from each other in the front-rear direction, but are moved up and down. Since they approach in the direction and the inclinations of the two are almost the same, they are visually integrated in a front view to form a “butterfly” form. The game area 15a and the transparent plate unit 35 exist between the board movable body 371 and the frame movable body 156. For example, in the center display frame unit 323, the upper constituent member 323c or the like on the upper side thereof is transparent. Since the panel movable body 371 and the frame movable body 156 can be visually recognized from the front side, there is no visual separation between the panel movable body 371 and the frame movable body 156. In addition, a non-inflow area 353 into which game balls cannot flow is disposed in an inward (downward) concave shape above the game area 15a, and the frame non-movable body 203 is disposed in front of the non-inflow area 353. Since the 371 and the frame movable body 156 are visually connected, the visual sense of unity between the panel movable body 371 and the frame movable body 156 is further strengthened.

  When the drive means 387 is operated in the reverse direction in a state where the movable platen 371 is at the upper limit position (FIGS. 61 (b1) and (b2)), the movable platen 371 follows the path opposite to the upward movement and moves to the origin position. (FIG. 61 (a1), (a2)). That is, the inclination of the movable platen 371 gradually decreases as it descends, and the inclination is eliminated when the guide roller 380 exceeds the bent portion 391a of the swing guide 391. Will be maintained. When the movable platen 371 reaches the origin position, the regulated portion 405 of the lifting slider 375 automatically engages with the regulating arm 402b against the urging force of the spring 406.

  Of course, the frame movable body 156 may be configured to move up and down with the same inclination as the panel movable body 371. However, as in the present embodiment, the panel movable body 371 is inclined when it reaches the upper limit position. By moving the panel movable body 371 without tilting other than the above, the operation space of the panel movable body 371 can be minimized. In addition, a swing drive unit for inclining the movable platen 371 may be provided separately. However, as in the present embodiment, separately from the elevating guide 383 for guiding the movable platen 371 in the up-down direction, this may be provided separately. By providing the swing guide 391 for guiding the movable panel 371 in the swing direction in parallel, it is possible to perform both the lifting and lowering drive and the swing drive of the movable panel 371 with one driving unit. is there.

  On the back side of the game board 15, for example, a ball collecting case 411 is arranged below the back mounting base 329 as shown in FIGS. The ball-collecting case 411 is used to win various prize-winning means or to collect game balls guided to the back side of the game board 15 through the out port 358, as shown in FIGS. 54 to 56. A discharge port 412 is provided on the lower side. The game balls collected in the ball collecting case 411 are discharged from the discharge port 412 to the outside of the machine via the discharge passage on the front frame 3 side. Further, the ball collecting case 411 is provided with out ball detection means 414 for detecting a game ball (out ball) passing through the outlet 412. A plurality of outlets 412 provided with the out-ball detecting means 414 may be provided in order to quickly detect the out-ball detecting means 414 without clogging the balls. Further, the out ball detecting means 414 may be provided on the front frame 3 side, for example, in a discharge passage.

  For example, a main board case 415 in which a main control board 415a is stored is mounted on the back side of the ball collecting case 411 as shown in FIG. An effect board case 416 in which the board 416a and the effect interface board 416b are stored, a liquid crystal substrate case 417 in which a liquid crystal control board 417a is stored, and the like are mounted.

  On the back side of the front frame 3, an opening / closing cover 418 for opening and closing the back side of the game board 15 is detachably mounted, and a game ball tank 419 and a tank rail 420 are dispensed to one side on the left side. The means 421 and the payout passage 422 are mounted respectively, and when a game ball wins a prize means such as the large prize means 347, or when a ball lending command is issued from an automatic ball lending machine (not shown), The game balls in the tank 419 are paid out by the payout means 421 via the tank rail 420, and the game balls are guided to the upper plate 44 via the payout passage 422. Note that the opening / closing cover 418 is disposed so as to cover, for example, a part of the upper side of the main board case 415 from the rear side.

  A substrate mounting base 423 is detachably mounted on the lower rear side of the front frame 3. A power supply board case 424 storing a power supply substrate 424 a and a payout control substrate 425 a are mounted on the back side of the substrate mounting base 423. Are respectively detachably mounted. The power supply board 424 a is provided with a power switch 426 that can be turned on / off from outside the power supply board case 424. Note that a discharge passage for discharging the out ball to the outside of the machine is provided integrally with the substrate mounting table 423, for example.

  FIG. 62A is a schematic block diagram of a control system of the present pachinko machine. In FIG. 62 (a), a main control board 415a supervises a game control operation, and includes a game information display means 326 on the game board 15, a normal symbol starting means 344, a first special symbol starting means 345, a second special symbol. The starting means 346, the big prize winning means 347, the normal prize winning means 348 to 350 and the like are connected via, for example, a relay board or the like (not shown), and below them, audio output based on a control command from the main control board 415a, An effect control board 416a for effect control such as lighting of an illuminated light and a movable body, a liquid crystal control board 417a for controlling the liquid crystal display means 327 based on a control command from the effect control board 416a, and a control command from the main control board 415a. Control board 425a which controls the payout means 421 based on the control of the delivery means 421 based on the firing control signal from the payout control board 425a. Sub-control means such as a fire control board 427 for controlling the firing means 16 Te are connected.

  Further, to the main control board 415a, operation means such as a RAM clear switch 431, a setting change operation means 432, and display means such as a performance information display means 433 are connected. As shown in FIG. 3, both the RAM clear switch 431 and the setting change operation means 432 can be operated from outside the main board case 415, and the performance information display means 433 can be visually recognized from outside the main board case 415. In this state, they are mounted on the main control board 415a. In the present embodiment, the RAM clear switch 431, the setting change operation unit 432, and the performance information display unit 433 are all located at positions not covered by the open / close cover 418.

  The RAM clear switch 431 is operated when the RAM is cleared when the power is turned on. The RAM clear switch 431 can be pressed, for example, from the outside of the main board case 415, and is turned off when not operated and turned on when pressed. ing. The setting change operation means 432 is used to change settings, etc., and can be switched ON / OFF by inserting, for example, a dedicated setting key into the keyhole portion from the outside of the main board case 415 and rotating it. It has become. In the present embodiment, by operating the setting change operation means 432 and the like, the jackpot probability, that is, the probability that the first and second special symbols are in the jackpot mode (probability of winning by random number lottery) is determined in a plurality of stages (here, (6 steps of settings 1 to 6). Details of this setting change and the like will be described later.

  The performance information display means 433 constitutes a setting display means 434 and a performance display means 435, and includes, for example, 4-digit 7-segment display sections 433a to 433d so that the performance information display means 433 can be visually recognized through the transparent main board case 415. For example, it is mounted on the main control board 415a in the main board case 415, functions as the setting display means 434 during the first period, and functions as the performance display means 435 during the second period different from the first period. Has become.

  The setting display unit 434 displays setting information indicating a setting value (in this case, any one of the settings 1 to 6) in a different display mode depending on whether the setting value is before confirmation, for example. Any one of "1" to "6" and "1." to "6." can be displayed on at least a part of the performance information display means 433 corresponding to the settings 1 to 6, and is fixed during the setting change period. The setting information corresponding to the previous setting value is, for example, “1” to “6” (first display mode) without dots, and corresponds to the determined setting value during a predetermined period after the end of the setting change period and during the setting confirmation period. The setting information to be displayed can be displayed, for example, as “1.” to “6.” with dots (second display mode). Of course, whether or not the set value is before determination may be expressed by a difference in display mode (for example, lighting / flashing) other than the presence or absence of a dot, or the same display of setting information corresponding to the set value before and after determination. You may display in an aspect.

  In the present embodiment, among the four-digit seven-segment display units 433a to 433d of the performance information display unit 433, when the front frame 3 is opened, the 7-segment display unit 433d on the left end side in rear view that is closest from the front side is displayed. Although used as the setting display unit 434, for example, a 7-segment display unit 433a other than the 7-segment display unit 433d may be used as the setting display unit 434, or 7-segment display units 433c to 433d, and 7-segment display units 433b to 433d. Alternatively, a 7-segment display unit having two or more digits may be used as the setting display unit 434.

  The performance display unit 435 displays a so-called base value on at least a part of the performance information display unit 433, for example, on the 7-segment display units 433a to 433d. The base value is an example of specific information obtained based on the game results, and is calculated by, for example, “(number of payouts in a specific period / number of outs in a specific period) × 100”. Here, the “specific period” is a period in which neither the jackpot game nor the special game state is performed. Therefore, the “specific period” starts when the symbol change that becomes the jackpot mode ends during the normal game state (when the start condition is satisfied), and the final symbol change (losing change) during the special game state is performed. It ends when it ends (when the end condition is satisfied). In the actual control processing, it is determined whether or not the start condition / end condition is satisfied after the symbol change ends. Therefore, when the start condition is satisfied after the symbol change ends, the specific period starts, and the symbol is changed. After the end of the fluctuation, the specific period may end when the end condition is satisfied.

  The performance display means 435 of the present embodiment can switch and display a plurality of types of base values, for example, four types of real-time base values, first cumulative base values, second cumulative base values, and third cumulative base values. . The real-time base value is a base value in real time during a unit measurement period until the number of outs reaches a predetermined number (for example, 60000). The first to third cumulative base values are respectively the base values of the cumulative total in the unit measurement period of 1 to 3 times before. Of course, only the base value in real time may be displayed, or one, two, or four or more kinds of total base values may be displayed.

  As described above, the RAM clear switch 431, the setting change operation unit 432, and the performance information display unit 433 (the setting display unit 434 and the performance display unit 435) are all disposed on the rear side of the gaming machine main body 1. It is necessary to unlock and open the front frame 3 in order to access the RAM, so that only the person related to the hall can operate the RAM clear switch 431 and the setting change operation means 432, and the performance information display means. 433 (setting display means 434, performance display means 435) cannot be viewed.

  In the present embodiment, the drive control of the game information display means 326 and the performance information display means 433 is mainly performed by the dynamic lighting method. As shown in FIG. 63, 1-byte scanning signals of the dynamic lighting commons C0 to C7 can be output from the LED common port of the main control board 415a, and among them, the lines of the dynamic lighting commons C0 to C3 are game information. Lines of dynamic lighting commons C4 to C7 are connected to the LED groups 326a to 326d of the display means 326 and to the 7-segment display sections 433a to 433d of the performance information display means 433, respectively.

  Also, 1-byte dynamic lighting data D10 to D17 and D20 to D27 can be output from the LED data ports 1 and 2 of the main control board 415a, respectively, and the line of the dynamic lighting data D10 to D17 of the LED data port 1 is a game. The lines of the dynamic lighting data D20 to D27 of the LED data port 2 are connected to the 7-segment display units 433a to 433d of the performance information display unit 433, respectively, to the LED groups 326a to 326d of the information display unit 326.

  The effect control board 416a and the liquid crystal control board 417a are connected to an effect interface board 416b connected to the main control board 415a as shown in FIG. 62 (a), and control from the main control board 415a to the effect control board 416a. The command and the control command from the effect control board 416a to the liquid crystal control board 417a are both transmitted via the effect interface board 416b.

  Various effect means controlled by the effect control board 416a, for example, the speakers 17, 30a, 30b, 31a, 31b, an illuminating means 436 composed of a large number of LEDs arranged in each part, a frame movable effect means 153, an operation effect In addition to the means 232, the board movable effect means 328, and the like, the effect operation means 43 and the like operable by the player are connected to the effect control board 416a via the effect interface board 416b, for example.

  Subsequently, a power-on process (FIG. 64) executed on the main control board 415a when the power is turned on will be described. In this power-on process (FIG. 64), first, interrupts are disabled so that interrupt processes such as timer interrupts are not executed (S1), a stack pointer is set (S2), and sub-board startup wait processes (S3 to S5) are performed. Execute. That is, a value corresponding to the sub-board activation waiting time (for example, 2 seconds) is set in a predetermined register (S3), and the subtraction processing (S4) is performed until the value becomes 0, that is, until the sub-board activation waiting time elapses. ) Repeatedly. In addition, the power supply abnormality signal monitoring process (S6), which stands by until the power supply abnormality signal is turned off, is executed, and the protection and the prohibited area of the RAM are invalidated (S7).

  Subsequently, the work area is initialized (S8). Here, for example, the solenoid port buffer and the power supply abnormality check counter are each cleared, and the initial value 01H is set in the system operation status. Further, a power-on command (BA08H) is transmitted to the effect control board 416a (S9). When the effect control board 416a receives the power-on command (BA08H), for example, a message such as "Please Wait" is displayed on the liquid crystal display means 327 (FIGS. 101 and 102).

  Then, it waits while clearing the WDT (Watchdog Timer) until the power-on signal and the payout communication confirmation signal acquired from the input port are turned ON (S10, S11).

  Subsequently, the flow shifts to the processing of S12 to S22 shown in FIG. The processing of S12 to S22 is “setting change” for executing the setting change processing (S14) and the RAM clear processing (S15), and executing the RAM clear processing (S15) without executing the setting change processing (S14). “RAM clear”, “setting confirmation” for executing setting confirmation processing (S20) and backup restoration processing (S21), “backup restoration” for executing backup restoration processing (S21) without executing setting confirmation processing (S20), This is performed in one of the five processing modes of “RAM abnormality” for executing the power re-waiting processing (S17).

  Of the five types of processing modes, the four types except the “RAM abnormality” include the ON / OFF state of the setting change operation unit 432, the ON / OFF state of the RAM clear switch 431, and the door (front frame 3). The selection is made according to the combination of the open / closed state. The open / closed state of the door is determined by an ON / OFF signal of a door open switch (not shown). The door opening switch is configured to be turned ON when the front frame 3 is opened forward with respect to the outer frame 2 and turned OFF when closed, for example.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69, when both the RAM clear switch 431 and the setting change operation means 432 are ON, “setting change” is selected in principle, the RAM clear switch 431 is turned ON, and the setting change operation is performed. When the means 432 is OFF, “RAM clear” is selected. However, even when both the setting change operating means 432 and the RAM clear switch 431 are ON, when the door is closed, “RAM change” is used instead of “Setting change”. "RAM clear" is selected. Similarly, when the RAM clear switch 431 is OFF and the setting change operation means 432 is ON, “setting confirmation” is selected in principle, and when both the RAM clear switch 431 and the setting change operation means 432 are OFF, "Return to backup" is selected. Even if the RAM clear switch 431 is OFF and the setting change operation means 432 is ON, "return to backup" is selected instead of "confirmation of setting" when the door is closed. It has become.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a situation in which the RAM clear switch 431 and the setting change operation means 432 are ON even though the door (front frame 3) is not open is suspected to be an illegal act. "Setting change" and "setting confirmation" relating to the function are subject to the condition that the door is opened, and in the case of closing the door, "RAM clear" in which the setting change process (S14) is not executed, and "in which the setting confirmation process (S20) is not executed" "Restore Backup" is selected. It should be noted that “RAM clear” and “backup recovery”, which are not related to the setting change function, are based on only the ON / OFF state of the RAM clear switch 431 and the setting change operation unit 432, and not on the open / closed state of the door. .

  Hereinafter, the processing of S12 to S22 will be described in detail according to the source program shown in FIGS. 66 and 67 illustrate the source programs of S12 to S22 in the order of storage on the memory. In addition, on the right side of the source program, the processes to be executed for each of the above-described five types of processing modes of “setting change”, “RAM clear”, “setting confirmation”, “backup restoration”, and “RAM abnormality” are described. Are shown by arrows and numbers at the upper right of the arrows.

  In the input port data acquisition process (S12), as shown in FIG. 66, the data of the input port (P_INPT1) is input to the A register (Sa1). In the present embodiment, the input signals corresponding to the 0th to 7th bits of the input port (P_INPT1) are as shown in FIG. 68, and the ON / OFF signal (door open signal) of the door open switch is set to the 4th bit. The ON / OFF signal of the RAM clear switch 431 is input to the fifth bit, and the ON / OFF signal of the setting change operating means 432 is input to the sixth bit. In Sa1, data of the 0th to 7th bits of the input port (P_INPT1) is input to the 0th to 7th bits of the A register, respectively.

  Subsequent to the input port data acquisition processing (S12), a setting change branch determination processing (S13) is executed. This setting change branch determination processing (S13) is for determining whether to select "setting change" as the processing mode. As shown in FIG. 66, the value of the A register and the mask data "01110000B" (@ DOPEN + The fourth bit corresponding to the ON / OFF signal of the door open switch (door open signal) and the fourth bit corresponding to the ON / OFF signal of the RAM clear switch 431 are obtained by calculating the logical product (AND) of the (RWMCR + ＠ SETKY). Five bits, other than the sixth bit corresponding to the ON / OFF signal of the setting change operating means 432, are masked, and the A register is updated with the masked data (Sb1).

  As shown in FIG. 69, the fourth bit of the A register after execution of the process of Sb1 is 1 when the door (front frame 3) is open, and is 0 when the door (front frame 3) is closed. , 1 when the RAM clear switch 431 is ON, and 0 when the RAM clear switch 431 is OFF. Similarly, the sixth bit is 1 when the setting change operating unit 432 is ON, and 0 when it is OFF. At this time, there are eight types of combinations of the values of the fourth, fifth, and sixth bits of the A register, as shown in FIG. In the following description, the combination of the values a4, a5, and a6 of the fourth, fifth, and sixth bits of the A register at this time is represented by A (a4, a5, a6) as necessary.

  Subsequently, the value of the A register is compared with "01110000B" (@ DOPEN + @ RWMCR + @ SETKY) to determine the difference between them (Sb2). The value thus obtained is set when the fourth, fifth and sixth bits of the A register are all 1 (A (1, 1, 1)), that is, when the door (front frame 3) is opened and the RAM clear switch 431 is set. When both the change operation means 432 are ON, the value is 0. If the obtained value (difference) is 0, for example, 1 is set to ZF (zero flag). If the value obtained in Sb2 is 0 (ZF = 1), that is, if A (1, 1, 1), “setting change” is selected as the processing mode, and SYSTEM_80 (RAM abnormality determination processing ( The process proceeds to the next setting change process (S14) without jumping to S18)) (Sb3).

  In the jump process of Sb3, the "JR" instruction of the relative address jump is used instead of the "JP" instruction of the absolute address jump. The "JP" instruction for an absolute address jump specifies the jump destination address with an absolute address (2 bytes), while the "JR" instruction for a relative address jump specifies the jump destination address with a relative address (1 byte). Therefore, the "JR" instruction has an advantage that the program capacity can be reduced by one byte. However, in the case of the “JR” instruction, the range that can be specified as a jump destination is limited as compared with the “JP” instruction, and is in the range of −128 to +127 bytes from the location of the PC register. Cannot be used when jumping.

  In the setting change process (S14), as shown in the source program of FIG. 66 and the flowchart of FIG. 70, first, a setting change start command (BA76H) indicating that the setting change period has started is transmitted (Sc1, Sc2). When the effect control board 416a receives the setting change start command (BA76H), for example, a message such as "Setting is being changed" is displayed on the liquid crystal display means 327 (FIG. 101).

  Next, the backup flag is cleared (Sc3). This is so that if a power failure occurs during the setting change period, a backup abnormality is determined in a RAM abnormality determination process (S16) described later when the power is turned on next time. Further, the system operation status is incremented (Sc4). As a result, the system operation status changes from the initial value 01H (see S8 in FIG. 64) to 02H.

  Subsequently, the setting value data is read from the setting value work area of the RAM, and is set as, for example, a W register as a setting work value (Sc5), and the value of the W register is decremented (Sc6). In the present embodiment, any one of the settings 1 to 6 can be selected as the set value, and any of 0 to 5 is set in the set value work area on the RAM in accordance with the set value (any of the settings 1 to 6). The set value data is stored. Therefore, if the value of the set value work area is normal, any one of 0 to 5 is first stored in the W register and then decremented to any one of -1 to 4.

  Subsequently, the setting work value of the W register is compared with 5 which is the maximum value of the setting value data (a value obtained by subtracting 1 from 6 which is the maximum setting value (＠DANMAX)), and the difference therebetween is a negative value. If so, 1 is set to CF (carry flag) (Sc7). Here, if the value of the set value data set in the W register in Sc5 is a normal value (any of 0 to 5), the value obtained by the comparison process in Sc7 is a negative value, and CF = 1. On the other hand, if the value of the set value data is an abnormal value (for example, 6), it does not become a negative value, so CF ≠ 0. Next, the setting work value of the W register is incremented (Sc8). Thus, the setting work value decremented in Sc6 returns to the original value.

  Then, it is determined whether or not CF = 1. If CF = 1, the process goes to Sc11 (SYSTEM_60) after clearing the setting work value of the W register in Sc10. If CF = 1, Sc10 is cleared. Skip to Sc11 (SYSTEM_60) (Sc9). Thereby, when there is an abnormality in the set value data, 0 corresponding to the setting 1 can be forcibly set to the set work value. Of course, the value set in the W register (setting work value) at the time of an abnormality is not limited to 0, but may be any value within a normal range (0 to 5).

  In the case of the present embodiment, since the RAM abnormality determination processing (S16) described later is not performed before the setting change processing (S14) (see FIG. 65), the setting value due to the RAM abnormality at the start of the setting change processing (S14). The set value data of the work area may not be within the normal range. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the setting change processing (S14), when the set value data is an abnormal value, the set value abnormality correction processing (Sc6 to Sc10) is performed to correct the set value data to a normal value (here, 0), thereby obtaining the RAM. Even in the case of an abnormality, the setting change process can be advanced.

  Subsequently, after the data of the WA register is saved on the stack in Sc11, the A register is cleared (Sc12), and the system input / output management processing (M_SYSIO) is called (Sc13).

  This system input / output management processing (first processing module, display control processing) mainly performs dynamic lighting control of the setting display unit 434 (the 7-segment display unit 433d of the performance information display unit 433). As shown in the source program of FIG. 71 and the flowchart of FIG. 71 (b), first, predetermined data ($ GAI1) is output to the external terminal port (P_GAIBU2) to turn on the output of the security signal (Ss1). The output to the port is cleared (Ss2). Then, the start address of the numerical 7-segment decode table (D_N7STBL) is set in the HL register (Ss3). As shown in FIG. 72, the 7-segment decoding table for numerical values includes six types of setting values 1 to 6 and 1 byte each corresponding to an error, and a total of 7 bytes of display pattern data.

  Subsequently, display pattern data is obtained from an address obtained by adding the value of the W register (the setting work value in the case of the setting change processing) to the value of the HL register (the top address of the 7-segment decoding table for numerical values). , And the value of the A register is updated by obtaining a logical sum (OR) with the A register (0 during the setting change process) (Ss4). As a result, for example, during the setting change process, the display pattern data corresponding to the set work value is stored in the A register, for example, “00000110B” for displaying “1” when the set work value is 0, If the value is 5, “01111101B” for displaying “6” is set.

  Then, the display pattern data of the A register is output to the LED data port 2 (P_LED2) (Ss5). Further, the LED output counter (W_LEDCNT) is incremented (Ss6). If the lower 2 bits of the LED output counter after the increment are “11”, the common data specifying the 7-segment display unit 433d (setting display means 434) ($ CMN23) is output to the LED common port (P_LEDCMN) (Ss7 to Ss9), but if the lower 2 bits of the LED output counter are not "11", Ss9 is skipped, so the output to the LED common port is cleared. Will remain. As a result, the setting display means 434 (7-segment display section 433d) displays a light-up state each time the lower 2 bits of the LED output counter becomes “11” (once every four times), and sets the setting work value at that time. Is displayed, and when the lower 2 bits of the LED output counter are not "11" (3 out of 4 times), the light is turned off.

  In the jump process of Ss8, a “JRS” instruction that can further reduce the program capacity than the “JR” instruction is used. In the case of the "JR" instruction, the instruction has one byte and the relative address of the jump destination is 1 byte, which is a total of 2 bytes. The total capacity is 1 byte, and the "JRS" instruction can reduce the program capacity by 1 byte more than the "JR" instruction. However, in the case of the “JRS” instruction, the range that can be specified as a jump destination is further limited than that of the “JR” instruction, and is in the range of −16 to +15 bytes from the location of the PC register.

  Subsequently, the system confirmation process (M_WAIT) is called (Ss10). The processing during system confirmation (waiting time forming module, period adjustment waiting time processing) is for providing a predetermined waiting time (about 4 ms in this case), and is performed by the source program shown in FIG. 73 (a) and FIG. 73 (b). First, the WDT is cleared (St1), and an initial value (6654 in this case) is set as a timer value in the WA register (St2). Then, after the decrement is repeated until the timer value of the WA register becomes 0 (St3, St4), the power supply abnormality check processing (M_PWRCHK) is called (St5), and the system check processing (M_WAIT) ends. In this embodiment, by setting 6654 as the timer initial value in St2, the execution time of the system checking process is substantially equal to 4 ms which is a timer interrupt cycle (data output timing cycle in the dynamic lighting method) described later. Are matched.

  In the power supply abnormality check processing (M_PWRCHK), first, as shown in FIG. 74, the power supply abnormality signal transmitted from the power supply board 424a is read twice (S41). Then, it is determined whether or not the levels of the power supply abnormality signals read twice match (S42). If the levels do not match (S42: No), the process returns to S41, and if the levels match (S42: Yes). ), It is determined whether or not the power supply abnormality signal is ON, that is, whether or not the level of the power supply abnormality signal is “H” level (S43).

  If the level of the power supply abnormality signal is not “H” level (ON) (S43: No), the value of the power supply abnormality confirmation counter is cleared (S44), and the power supply abnormality check processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the level of the power supply abnormality signal is the “H” level (ON) (S43: Yes), the value of the power supply abnormality confirmation counter is incremented (S45), and the value of the power supply abnormality confirmation counter after the increment is increased. For example, it is determined whether or not the number has reached 2 (S46). If the value of the power supply abnormality check counter is less than 2 (S46: No), the power supply abnormality check processing is terminated.

  If the value of the power abnormality check counter has reached 2 in S46 (S46: Yes), it is determined that the power is abnormal, a power off command (BA33H, BA55H) is transmitted (S47), and the system operation status is 00H. , The backup flag is set to ON (= AA55H) (S48, S49). Here, for example, since the system operation status is set to 02H during the setting change processing (Sc4), if a power failure occurs during the setting change processing, the backup flag remains OFF (= 0000H).

  Then, the protection of the RAM is enabled and the prohibited area is disabled (S50). As a result, data writing to the RAM is prohibited in the subsequent processing. Also, after clearing output ports such as an external terminal port, a sub port, a solenoid port, an LED common port, and an LED data port (S51), disabling a timer interrupt (S52), the infinite loop processing is repeated while clearing the WDT, It waits until the power supply voltage drops and the CPU enters the non-operation state (S53).

  Returning to FIG. 71, the description will be continued. When the above-described system checking process (M_WAIT) is completed (Ss10), an operation input information acquisition process for acquiring input information of the RAM clear switch 431, the setting change operation unit 432, and the like is executed using the input data table (D_SWINTBL2). (Ss11, Ss12), and ends the system input / output management processing (M_SYSIO).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 71 (c), every time the system input / output management processing is executed, the LED output counter is incremented and a waiting time of 4 ms is provided. Only when the lower bit is "11", common data designating the 7-segment display unit 433d (setting display means 434) is output to the LED common port (P_LEDCMN), and the output to the LED common port is cleared otherwise. State. As a result, the lighting / light-off pattern of the 7-segment display unit 433d (setting display means 434) is 4ms on → 12ms off → 4ms on → 12ms off →... By the performance display means 435 (performance information display means 433) described later. This is consistent with the lighting / light-off pattern of the 7-segment display unit 433d when displaying the base value (4 ms on → 12 ms off → 4 ms on → 12 ms off →...).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the processing of Sc7 to Sc19 or Sc11 to Sc19 (processing during setting change) is repeated at high speed until the setting change operating means 432 is turned off (Sc15, Sc16). It is determined whether or not the operation has been performed (Sc17 to Sc19), that is, whether or not the RAM clear switch 431 has changed from OFF to ON. However, the operation input information acquisition processing (Ss11, Since a waiting time of 4 ms (predetermined waiting time) is provided by calling (Ss10) the processing during system confirmation (predetermined waiting time processing) before Ss12), erroneous detection due to chattering of the RAM clear switch 431 can be prevented. . In addition, since the predetermined waiting time (4 ms) uses a cycle adjustment waiting time for creating a 4 ms cycle for dynamic lighting control, there is a case where a processing program for chattering prevention waiting time is separately provided. The program capacity can be reduced in comparison.

  Returning to FIG. 70, the description will be continued. When the above-described system input / output management processing (M_SYSIO) is completed (Sc13), the data is restored from the stack to the WA register (Sc14). It is determined whether an OFF edge has been detected (Sc15), and if no OFF edge of the setting change operating means 432 has been detected, it is determined whether a predetermined setting change operation has been performed (Sc16, Sc17). In the present embodiment, the RAM clear switch 431 is also used for the setting change operation. In Sc17, when the ON edge of the RAM clear switch 431 is detected, it is determined that the setting change operation has been performed.

  When it is determined that the setting change operation has been performed, the process proceeds to Sc7 (SYSTEM_50) (Sc18). That is, the setting work value at that time is compared with the maximum value 5 of the setting value data (a value obtained by subtracting 1 from 6 which is the maximum setting value (＠DANMAX)), and if the difference therebetween is a negative value. In this case, 1 is set to CF (carry flag) (Sc7). Thus, CF = 1 only when the set work value is 0 to 4 out of 0 to 5. Next, the set work value is incremented (Sc8). If CF is not 1 (if the set work value after the increment is 6, the set work value is set to 0 (Sc9, Sc10).

  As described above, in this embodiment, each time a setting change operation (operation of the RAM clear switch 431) is performed during the setting change period, the setting work value change processing of Sc7 to Sc10 is performed, thereby responding to the setting change operation. The setting work value is cyclically changed within a range of 0 to 5. In this setting work value change process (Sc7 to Sc10), the above-described set value abnormality correction process (Sc6 to Sc10) and a part of the process (Sc7 to Sc10) are shared, so that the setting work value change process (Sc7 to Sc10) is compared with the case of performing another process. Program capacity can be kept small.

  Subsequent to the setting work value change processing (Sc7 to Sc10), the processing after Sc11 is performed. If it is determined that there is no setting change operation in Sc17, the process proceeds to Sc11. Since the processing of Sc11 to Sc14 has already been described, the details are omitted here, but by this processing, the display of the setting display means 434 also changes according to the change of the setting work value.

  As described above, in the setting change processing (S14), as long as the setting change operation means 432 is ON, the processing of Sc7 to Sc14 is performed when the setting change operation is performed, and when the setting change operation is not performed. Are repeatedly executed from Sc11 to Sc14. When the setting change operation means 432 is switched from ON to OFF and the setting change end condition is satisfied, the setting change period ends, and the setting work value of the W register is stored in the setting value work area (Sc20). Thereby, the provisional setting work value changed by operating the RAM clear switch 431 during the setting change period is determined as the set value data. Then, the process jumps to the RAM clear process (S15) (Sc21), and ends the setting change process.

  In the following RAM clear processing (S15), as shown in the source program of FIG. 67 and the flowchart of FIG. 75, first, a specific range of the work area (RAM in the area) in the area is cleared (Sg1 to Sg6). That is, first, the address (W_BACKFLG) of the backup flag area in the intra-area RAM is set in the HL register (Sg1). This is the start address of the clear target range. Also, the A register is cleared (Sg2). Then, the process (Sg3) of clearing the area specified by the HL register and incrementing the value of the HL register is repeatedly executed until the value of the HL register reaches, for example, the start address (@ RWM2TOP) of the RAM outside the area. (Sg3-Sg5).

  In the present embodiment, a predetermined range on the RAM is allocated as a work area in the area (RAM within the area), and a subsequent predetermined range is allocated as a work area outside the area (RAM outside the area). Therefore, the areas after the backup flag area in the in-area RAM are cleared to 0 by Sg1 to Sg5. In the present embodiment, since the areas for storing the LED output counter, the system operation status, and the set value data are provided before the backup flag area in the in-area RAM, they are not cleared by the processing of Sg3 to Sg5. Note that the LED output counter is cleared to 0 in the next Sg6.

  Subsequent to the processing of clearing the RAM in the area (Sg1 to Sg6), the head address of the initial value setting table (D_INITSET2) is loaded into the HL register (Sg7), and the data set processing is called (Sg8). An initial value (for example, a value corresponding to 30 seconds) is set in the information timer, and a predetermined deviation mode is set in the first special symbol and the second special symbol. This illegal information timer is for counting the output time of the security signal, and outputs a security signal until the value of the illegal information timer becomes 0, for example, in a timer interrupt process described later.

  Subsequently, a setting change passage determination process (Sg9) for determining whether or not the process has passed the setting change process (S14) is executed. In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the value of the system operation status (initial value 01H) is 02H (see Sc4). If the value of the system operation status is 02H, the process goes through the setting change process (S14). Then, the next process via setting change (Sg11 to Sg22) is executed. If the value of the system operation status is not 02H, the process upon setting change is skipped and the process proceeds to Sg23. .

  In the process via setting change (Sg11 to Sg22), first, the system operation status is set to 00H (Sg11), and a setting change end command (BA77H) indicating that the setting change period has ended is transmitted (Sg12, Sg13). By setting 00H to the system operation status, for example, even if a power failure occurs thereafter, the backup flag is turned ON (= AA55H) in S48 and S49 of the power supply abnormality check processing (FIG. 74) described above. When the power is turned on, there is no need to wait for the power to be turned on again due to a backup error.

  Further, common data ($ CMN23) designating the 7-segment display unit 433d (setting display unit 434) is output to the LED common port (P_LEDCMN) (Sg14). Then, the start address of the 7-segment decode table for numerical value (D_N7STBL) (FIG. 72) is set in the HL register, the value of the set value data is set in the A register (Sg15, Sg16), and the value of the HL register (7 for numerical value) is set. Display pattern data is obtained from the address obtained by adding the value of the A register (set value data) to the start address of the seg decode table), and is set in the A register (Sg17). As a result, in the A register, the display pattern data corresponding to the set value data, for example, “00000110B” for displaying “1” when the set value data is 0, and “6” when the set value data is 5 "01111101B" for displaying is set.

  Then, the value of the A register is updated by calculating the logical sum (OR) of the value of the A register and "10000000B" (@SEG_DP) which is the display pattern data corresponding to ". (Dot)" (Sg18). Then, the display pattern data of the A register is output to the LED data port 2 (P_LED2) (Sg19). As a result, any one of “1.” to “6.” is set in the setting display unit 434, that is, in the performance information display unit 433, corresponding to the set value data (any of 0 to 5) determined by the setting change process. It is displayed on the segment display section 433d. As described above, when the setting change period ends and the set value data is determined, the display mode of the setting information displayed on the setting display unit 434 is made different from that during the previous setting change period (for example, dots are added). By doing so, it is possible to visually notify the operator that the set value data has been determined. At this time, instead of or in addition to the change in the display content (addition of dots, etc.), the light amount may be changed (for example, increased) or the display pattern may be changed (for example, from blinking to lighting).

  Subsequently, a waiting time process (Sg20 to Sg22) for a predetermined time (for example, about 1 second) is executed. That is, first, a value (here, 250) corresponding to a predetermined time (for example, about 1 second) is set in the B register (Sg20), and the above-described system checking process (M_WAIT) is performed while subtracting the value of the B register from the above. The process is repeatedly executed until the value of the B register after the subtraction becomes 0 (Sg21, Sg22). As described above, the processing during system confirmation in this embodiment is for providing a waiting time of 4 ms. By repeating this 250 times, the set value data (0 to 5) after the determination by the setting display unit 434 is determined. ) (Hereinafter, referred to as setting change confirmation display) can be continued for about 1 second.

  Also, during the waiting time processing (1 second) for the setting change confirmation display, the system control is being used to adjust the data output timing to a constant cycle by the display control of the setting display means 434 (7-segment display unit 433d). Since the process (waiting time forming module) is used, the program capacity can be reduced as compared with the case where a dedicated waiting time process is provided. In this embodiment, the drive control is performed by the static lighting method for the setting change confirmation display for about one second as described above.

  Subsequent to the above-described processing via setting change (Sg11 to Sg22), the lower byte data for the RAM clear command, 02H, is set in the W register, and the processing jumps to the common processing (S22) (Sg23, Sg24). The RAM clear processing ends.

  In the common process (S22), first, as shown in the source program of FIG. 67 and the flowchart of FIG. 76, BA01H (initialize command data) is stored in the DE register (Sk1), and the command data is transmitted by the command transmission process (Sk2). Send. Further, the W register is loaded into the E register (Sk3), and the command data of the DE register is transmitted by the command transmission processing (Sk4). For example, in the case of "setting change", since 02H is set in the W register (Sg23), the lower byte of BA01H stored in the DE register is changed to 02H and BA02H (RAM clear command) is transmitted. Is done.

  Subsequently, a game state notification information update process (M_MKINFO) is executed (Sk5). In the game state notification information update processing (Sk5), various commands are transmitted according to the processing mode. That is, when the processing mode is any of “setting confirmation” and “backup restoration”, the first and second special reserved number designation commands (B0xxH, B1xxH) based on the values of the first and second special reserved numbers, A set value command (F6xxH) based on the set value data and a state designation command (FAxxH to FDxxH) based on the game state are sequentially transmitted (Sk51 → Sk52 to Sk54). When the processing mode is neither “setting confirmation” nor “backup restoration”, that is, “setting change” or “RAM clear”, the setting value command (F6xxH) based on the setting value data is issued. The first and second special reserved number designation commands (B0xxH, B1xxH) and the status designation commands (FAxxH to FDxxH) are not transmitted (Sk51 → Sk55). Further, when the first and second special symbols are not changing, the waiting command (BA04H) is transmitted (Sk56, Sk57).

  Then, initial values are set in various internal function registers (Sk6 to Sk10). For example, the LED common port is cleared here, thereby ending the setting change confirmation display for about one second. In addition, the work area is initialized (Sk11, Sk12). In the initial setting of the work area, for example, 00H is set to the system operation status, the firing control signal is set to ON, and the initial value is set to the operation confirmation timer.

  The operation check timer is for measuring the execution time of the operation check display of the performance display means 435, and is stored in, for example, the RAM in the area. As an initial value, for example, a value obtained by adding 1 to a timer value corresponding to 4800 ms is used. Set. In the present embodiment, since the operation confirmation timer is decremented by 1 in the timer interrupt processing executed at a period of 4 ms as described later (S82 in FIG. 89), the timer value corresponding to 4800 ms is 1200, and the operation confirmation timer The initial value is 1201 obtained by adding 1 to this. As described above, in the present embodiment, the initial setting of the operation check timer used for measuring the execution time of the operation check display is performed in the process at the time of turning on the power (before the main loop process).

  Returning to the setting change branch determination processing in S13 (FIGS. 65 and 66), the description will be continued. If the value obtained in Sb2 is not 0 (ZF ≠ 1), that is, if not A (1, 1, 1), the process jumps to SYSTEM_80 in FIG. 66, that is, the RAM abnormality determination processing (S16) (Sb3). .

  The RAM abnormality determination processing (S16) is for determining whether to select the processing mode of "RAM abnormality". First, as shown in FIG. 66, it is determined whether or not the RAM is abnormal (Sd1, Sd2). . That is, set value data is obtained from the set value work area (W_SETVAL) of the RAM in the area, and the difference between the set value data and the set maximum value (＠DANMAX) of 6 is obtained (Sd1). In the case of the present embodiment, the set value work area on the RAM should store any set value data of 0 to 5 depending on which of 1 to 6 is selected. If so, the difference between the set value data and 6 is a negative value. Therefore, if the difference is not a negative value (JF = 0), it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, and the process jumps to SYSTEM_90, that is, the power re-waiting process (S17) (Sd2).

  If the RAM is not abnormal, it is determined whether or not the backup is abnormal (Sd3, Sd4). That is, the value of the backup flag is compared with AA55H ($ BACKUP) to determine the difference between them (Sd3). If the difference is not 0 (ZF ≠ 1), it is determined that the backup is abnormal, and the process proceeds to the next SYSTEM_90, that is, the power re-waiting process (S17) without jumping (Sd4).

  As described above, the backup flag is cleared in the setting change processing (S14) (Sc3), and if a power failure is detected in the power failure check processing, the backup flag is turned ON (=) only when the system operation status is 00H. AA55H), if a power failure occurs during the setting change period, the next time the power is turned on, the RAM abnormality determination processing (S16) determines that the backup is abnormal, and the power is turned on again. The waiting process (S17) is executed.

  In the power-on / waiting process (S17), as shown in the source program of FIG. 66 and the flowchart of FIG. 77, the power-on / off command (BA7FH) is transmitted first (Se1, Se2). When the effect control board 416a receives the power-on command (BA7FH), for example, a message such as "RAM error, power-on and determine the setting to 1" is displayed on the liquid crystal display means 327 (FIG. 102). .

  Then, 06H which is an offset value for displaying "E" is set in the W register (Se3), the A register is cleared (Se4), and the system input / output management processing (M_SYSIO) is called (Se5). The process is in a power re-waiting state (Se6) in which the process of (1) is repeated infinitely. Here, the system input / output management processing is as described in the setting change processing (S14), but the operation is partially different from that in the setting change processing due to the difference in the value of the W register. That is, in this power-on / standby processing, 06H is set in the W register at the time of calling the system input / output management processing (Se3). Therefore, in Ss4 of the system input / output management processing (FIG. 71), 7-segment for numerical value is used. The seventh display pattern data in the decode table, that is, “01111001B” for displaying “E” is set in the A register. Therefore, “E” indicating an error is displayed on the setting display unit 434, that is, on the 7-segment display unit 433 d of the performance information display unit 433.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the processing related to the dynamic lighting control of the performance information display unit 433 and the power supply abnormality check processing are set as the system input / output management processing (display control module), the setting change processing (S14), the power supply restart wait processing (S17) The capacity of the program is reduced by making it common among the others.

  Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, in the case of a RAM abnormality or a backup abnormality, the power is forcibly turned on again by shifting to a power-on wait state. When the power-on wait processing (S17) is executed due to the RAM abnormality, if it is not A (1, 1, 1) in S13 at the time of the next power-on, it is again determined that the RAM is abnormal and the power is turned on again. The waiting process (S17) is executed. Therefore, when the power is turned on again after the power is turned on again, the door (front frame 3) is opened, and the RAM clear switch 431 and the setting change operating means 432 are both turned on, so that the setting change processing ( It is necessary to execute S14) and set the set value to an arbitrary value among the settings 1 to 6.

  As described above, in the case of “RAM abnormality”, the power supply is turned on again, the setting change process (S14) is executed, and the power supply waits for the setting value to be set to a normal value. In this regard, in the case of “setting change” in which the setting change process (S14) is performed, it is not necessary to wait for the power to be turned on again even if the RAM is abnormal. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the RAM abnormality determination processing (S16) is executed after the setting change branch determination processing (S13) in order to eliminate useless processing.

  Returning to the RAM abnormality determination processing in S16, the description will be continued. If it is determined in S16 that neither the RAM abnormality nor the backup abnormality is present, the flow shifts to SYSTEM_110 in FIG. 67, that is, the RAM clear branch determination processing (S18) (Sd4). This RAM clear branch determination processing (S18) is for determining whether or not to select the processing mode of "RAM clear". As shown in FIG. 67, first, the value of the fifth bit (@B_RWMCR) of the A register is set. Is transferred to the CF (carry flag) (Sf1). If the CF (the fifth bit of the A register) is 1, that is, if the RAM clear switch 431 is ON, the processing mode of “RAM clear” is selected, and the next RAM clear is performed without jumping in Sf2. The process proceeds to the process (S15), but otherwise jumps to SYSTEM_160, that is, the setting confirmation branch determination process (S19).

  In the present embodiment, out of the eight combinations of the values of the fourth, fifth, and sixth bits of the A register, the RAM clear branch determination process (S18) is executed for seven other than A (1,1,1). This is the case for types. Of these seven types, the processing mode of “RAM clear” is selected from three types of A (0, 1, 1), A (1, 1, 0), and A (0, 1, 0). In this case (see FIG. 69), in S18, it is sufficient to determine only the fifth bit of the fourth, fifth, and sixth bits of the A register.

  Since the set value work area is not cleared in the RAM clear processing (S15) as described above, the RAM abnormality determination processing (S16) is executed before the RAM clear branch determination processing (S18) in the present embodiment. It is configured.

  The RAM clear processing (S15) and the subsequent processing are as described above, but in this case, at Sg9 in the RAM clear processing (S15), the system operation status remains at the initial value of 01H. In the setting change pass determination process (Sg9), it is determined that the setting change process (S14) has not been passed, and the process of passing the setting change (Sg11 to Sg22) is not executed. Therefore, since the setting change confirmation display is not performed for about one second, no one-second waiting time is wastefully provided even though the setting change is not performed.

  The setting confirmation branch determination processing (S19) to be shifted to when the fifth bit of the A register is determined not to be 1 in the RAM clear branch determination processing (S18) is any of the processing modes of “setting confirmation” and “backup restoration”. Is to be determined. In this way, by performing the setting confirmation branch determination processing (S19) after the RAM abnormality determination processing (S16), it is possible to avoid a situation in which it is not possible to return due to a RAM abnormality after it is determined that the setting has been confirmed or backup has been restored.

  In the setting confirmation branch determination process (S19), as shown in FIG. 67, first, the value of the A register is compared with "01010000B" (@ DOPEN + @ SETKY) to determine the difference between them (Sh1). The value obtained by this is that when the fourth and sixth bits of the A register are 1 and the fifth bit is 0 (= A (1, 0, 1)), that is, the door (front frame 3) is opened and the RAM is cleared. It becomes 0 when the switch 431 is OFF and the setting change operation means 432 is ON (see FIG. 69). If the obtained value (difference) is 0, for example, 1 is set to ZF (zero flag). If the value obtained in Sh1 is not 0 (ZF = 0), that is, if it is not A (1, 0, 1), a processing mode of “backup restoration” is selected instead of “setting confirmation”, and Skips the setting confirmation process (S20), and jumps to SYSTEM_180, ie, the backup restoration process (S21) (Sh2).

  In the present embodiment, among the eight combinations of the values of the fourth, fifth, and sixth bits of the A register, the setting confirmation branch determination process (S19) is performed only when the fifth bit is 0 (zero). It is. Of these four types, the processing mode of “setting confirmation” is selected only in the case of A (1, 0, 1), and the other A (0, 0, 1) and A (1) , 0, 0) and A (0, 0, 0), the processing mode of “backup restoration” is selected (see FIG. 69).

  In the backup restoration process (S21), as shown in FIG. 67, first, the address of the backup flag in the intra-region RAM is set in the HL register (Sj1), and the address of the winning opening error detection timer 3 in the intra-region RAM is set to the backup flag. The value obtained by subtracting the address and adding 1 is set in the B register (Sj2), and the 0 clear processing is called (Sj3). In the present embodiment, a backup flag work area is provided next to the set value work area of the RAM in the area, and an error-related work is performed between the work area following the backup flag work area and the winning opening error detection timer 3 work area. Area. Accordingly, the backup flag work area in the intra-area RAM and the subsequent error-related work area are cleared to 0 by Sj1 to Sj3. As described above, even when the backup is restored, only the error-related work area is cleared to 0 so that the error information before the power failure is not carried over.

  Then, 03H, which is the lower byte data for the power failure recovery display command, is set in the W register (Sj4), and the flow shifts to the next common process (S22). The common processing (S22) is as described above, but in this case, since 03H is set in the W register, transmission of the initialization command (BA01H) (Sk1, Sk2) is followed by a power failure recovery display command. (BA03H) is transmitted.

  Returning to the setting confirmation branch determination process (S19), the description will be continued. In Sh2 of FIG. 67, if the value obtained in Sh1 is 0 (ZF = 1), that is, if A (1, 0, 1), the processing mode of “setting confirmation” is selected, and SYSTEM_180 (backup) The process proceeds to the next setting confirmation process S20 without jumping to the return process S21).

  In the setting confirmation process (S20), as shown in the source program of FIG. 67 and the flowchart of FIG. 78, first, an initial value (for example, a value corresponding to 30 seconds) is set in an illegal information timer (W_SGTMER) (Si1). This illegal information timer is for counting the output time of the security signal, and outputs a security signal until the value of the illegal information timer becomes 0, for example, in a timer interrupt process described later. In the present embodiment, in the case of “setting confirmation”, the initial value is set in the fraudulent information timer at the start of the setting confirmation process (S20). Output of the security signal is guaranteed. That is, for example, when the setting of the initial value in the fraudulent information timer is performed at the end of the setting confirmation process (S20), for example, the power is turned off (power interruption) during the setting confirmation period, the setting change operation means 432 is turned off, and If the backup is restored by turning on the power again (recovery from power failure), there is a possibility that the output of the security signal may be cancelled. Since the initial value corresponding to the second is set, the output of the security signal cannot be canceled. That is, in the present embodiment, the security signal is output to the outside even when the power is cut off during the execution of the setting confirmation process (S20) and the game process is executed without executing the setting confirmation process (S20) when the power is restored after the interruption. Therefore, it is possible to output the security signal for a predetermined period of time.

  Subsequently, a setting confirmation start command (BA60H) indicating that the setting confirmation period has started is transmitted (Si2, Si3). When the effect control board 416a receives the setting confirmation start command (BA60H), for example, a message such as "setting is being confirmed" is displayed on the liquid crystal display means 327 (FIG. 102). For example, by adding the setting value data to the lower byte of the setting confirmation start command (BA60H), the setting confirmation start command (BA60H to BA65H) to which the information of the setting value data is added may be transmitted.

  Next, the set value data acquired from the set value work area is set in the W register (Si4), and "10000000B" (@SEG_DP), which is the display pattern data corresponding to ". (Dot)", is set in the A register. In the above (Si5), the system input / output management processing (M_SYSIO) is called (S6). A series of processing is repeatedly executed until the setting confirmation end condition is satisfied, that is, until the OFF edge of the setting change operation means 432 is detected. (Si7, Si8).

  Here, the system input / output management processing has already been described in the setting change processing (S14) and the power supply re-waiting processing (S17). However, since the values of the W register and the A register are different, the setting change processing is performed. A part of the operation is different from that of the power re-waiting process. That is, in this setting confirmation process, when the system input / output management process is called, the setting value data is set in the W register, and the display pattern data corresponding to “. (Dot)” is set in the A register (Si4, Si5), in Ss4 of the system input / output management processing (FIG. 71), from the address obtained by adding the value of the W register (set value data) to the value of the HL register (the top address of the numerical 7-segment decoding table). The display pattern data is acquired, and the value of the A register is updated by obtaining a logical sum (OR) with the A register (display pattern data corresponding to “. (Dot)”). As a result, one of “1.” to “6.” is displayed on the setting display unit 434, that is, the 7-segment display unit 433d of the performance information display unit 433, corresponding to the set value data (any of 0 to 5). Is done.

  Then, when the OFF edge of the setting change operation means 432 is detected, a setting confirmation end command (BA67H) indicating that the setting confirmation period has ended is transmitted (Si9, Si10), and the backup restoration processing (S21) already described. Move to

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the processing related to the dynamic lighting control of the setting display unit 434 (the 7-segment display unit 433d) and the power supply abnormality check processing are set as the system input / output management processing (M_SYSIO). The program capacity is reduced by sharing between the input waiting process (S17) and the setting confirmation process (S20).

  When the above steps S12 to S22 are completed, the process proceeds to the main loop processing (S23 to S28). In this main loop processing, interrupts are prohibited (S23), various random numbers are updated (S24), all registers are saved in the stack area (S25), and after executing out-of-area processing (S26), all registers are restored. (S27), and a series of processing of permitting an interrupt (S28) is repeatedly executed. As a result, the timer interrupt process is called and executed at a period of, for example, 4 ms.

  In the out-of-area processing (S26), as shown in FIG. 79, the in-area stack pointer is first saved (S61), and the out-of-area RAM check processing (S62) is executed. In the out-of-area RAM check processing (S62), for example, as shown in FIG. 80, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the out-of-area RAM (S71). (S71: Yes), the RAM outside the area is initialized (cleared) (S72).

  As described above, when an abnormality occurs in the out-of-area RAM during the main loop, the out-of-area RAM is initialized (S71, S72), but in the present embodiment, the operation confirmation timer is stored in the in-area RAM. Therefore, for example, even if an abnormality occurs in the out-of-area RAM before the value of the operation confirmation timer reaches 0, the value of the operation confirmation timer is not cleared.

  Subsequent to the out-of-area RAM check processing (S62), the performance display total division processing (S63) is executed. The performance display aggregation / division process (S63) is for calculating a base value (specific value) to be displayed on the performance display means 435, and for each unit measurement period until the "total number of outs" reaches a predetermined number (for example, 60000). During the jackpot game (including during the jackpot start / end interval), during the specific period excluding the high probability state and the extended open state (hereinafter referred to as "normal out number"), and during the specific period The number of payouts (hereinafter, referred to as “normal payout number”) is counted, and the “normal payout number” is divided by the “normal out number” to calculate a real-time base value (specific value). Note that the main control board 415a that executes the performance display aggregation / division process (S63) constitutes a specific value calculation unit that calculates a base value (specific value).

  In the present embodiment, a total out counter that counts the “total number of outs” based on the detection signal from the out ball detection means 414 and a normal out counter that counts the “normal number of outs” based on the detection signal from the out ball detection means 414 An out counter and a prize counter (specific number counter) for counting the number of prizes (specific number) to each prize means during a specific period based on a detection signal from a prize detection means provided in each prize means. I have. The “normal payout number” is counted based on the number of winnings to each winning means by the winning counter and the number of winning balls for each winning means. FIG. 81 shows switching between addition and non-addition of each counter for each game state. In the following description, a period added to the prize counter and the normal out counter when the prize detecting unit and the out ball detecting unit 414 detect a game ball is referred to as an “addition period”, and a period not added is referred to as a “non-addition period”.

  In the performance display total division processing (S63), the count processing by each counter is always performed, but the base value calculation processing using the counter value is executed when the start value is set in the total division counter described later. It is not executed at any other time. When the unit measurement period ends, the real-time base value at that time becomes a new first cumulative base value, and the first and second cumulative base values up to that time are respectively replaced with new second and third cumulative base values. Become.

  After execution of the performance display aggregation / division process (S63), the in-area stack pointer is restored (S64), and the out-of-area processing ends.

  In the present embodiment, the counting by the winning counter is performed based on the detection by the winning detecting units 345a to 350a provided in the respective winning units 345 to 350, and the counting by the normal out counter is performed based on the detection by the out ball detecting unit 414. However, as shown in FIG. 51, there is a distance between each of the winning detection means 345a to 350a and the out ball detecting means 414, so that one game ball passes through the winning detecting means and then passes through the out ball detecting means 414. It takes some time to complete. FIG. 82 shows the minimum value and the maximum value of the elapsed time from when the game ball passes through the prize detection means to when it passes through the out ball detection means 414. (Excluding the large winning prize means 347). Similarly, for the out port 358, the minimum value and the maximum value of the elapsed time from passing through the out port 358 to passing through the out ball detecting means 414 are shown. Hereinafter, the elapsed time from passing through the prize detecting means or the out mouth to passing through the out ball detecting means 414 is referred to as “specific elapsed time”.

  In the present embodiment, as is clear from the positional relationship between the winning detection means and the out ball detection means 414 shown in FIG. 51, the magnitude relationship between the minimum values Ta1 to Te1 shown in FIG. 82 is Tb1> Tc1> Td1> Ta1> Te1. Similarly, the magnitude relationship between the maximum values Ta2 to Te2 is Tb2> Tc2> Td2> Ta2> Te2. In addition, for example, a second out port is provided in the normal winning unit 325, and a third out port is provided in the unit of the grand prize means 347, and the minimum and maximum values of the specific elapsed time relating to the second out port are Tf1 and Tf2, respectively. Assuming that the minimum and maximum values of the specific elapsed time for the 3-out mouth are Tg1 and Tg2, respectively, the magnitude relationship between the minimum values Ta1 to Tg1 is, for example, Tb1> Tc1> Td1> Tf1> Tg1> Ta1> Te1, and the maximum value is also the same. The magnitude relationship between Ta2 and Tg2 is, for example, Tb2> Tc2> Td2> Tf2> Tg2> Ta2> Te2. Hereinafter, when assuming that a second out port is provided, Tf1 and Tf2 are used as the minimum and maximum values of the specific elapsed time, and when assuming that a third out port is also provided, the specific elapsed time is used. Tg1 and Tg2 are used as the minimum and maximum values of.

  Here, depending on the prize timing of the prize winning means, when the prize detecting means passes, the transition to the non-addition period occurs when the out ball detecting means 414 passes, despite the addition period (specific period). It is conceivable that the prize counter is incremented but the out counter is not normally incremented. Conversely, although the non-addition period is passed when the prize detection unit passes, the addition period is passed when the out ball detection unit 414 passes. By moving to the (specific period), the prize counter may not be added, but the normal out counter may be added.

  In order to solve such an inconvenience, in the present embodiment, during the normal gaming state, the jackpot change of the first and second special symbols (the last symbol change before the end condition of the specific period is satisfied) is executed. Is configured to make the fluctuation time longer than the maximum value (specific time) of the specific elapsed time of the starting winning means relating to the symbol fluctuation. In the case where the last first and second special symbols before the end of the special game state change (the last symbol change before the start condition of the specific period is satisfied), the change time is set to the symbol change time. It is configured to be longer than the maximum value (specific time) of the specific elapsed time of the start winning means relating to the fluctuation.

  FIG. 83 (a) shows a symbol change in which a game ball wins in the first special symbol starting means 345 in the normal gaming state and the first special reserved number is 0 and the first special symbol displaying means 363 makes a big hit. Shows an example in the case where is performed. In this case, at the end of the change of the first special symbol, the period shifts from the addition period (specific period) to the non-addition period (big hit game), and the change time of the first special symbol is the specific progress of the first special symbol starting means 345. Since it is longer than Ta2 (see FIG. 82), which is the maximum value of the time (elapsed time from when the game ball passes through the winning detection means 345a to when it passes through the out ball detection means 414), the game ball is detected by the winning detection means 345a. And the timing at which the game ball passes through the out-ball detecting means 414 are both during the addition period, and the above-described inconvenience does not occur.

  FIG. 83 (b) shows the final fluctuation (for example, the 50th time) of the game time when the game ball wins in the second special symbol starting means 346 in the time saving state and the second special reserved number is 0 and the second special symbol starting means 346 is in the state. An example is shown in which the second special symbol display means 364 has performed a loss change. In this case, the transition from the non-addition period (time saving state) to the addition period (specific period) is performed at the end of the change of the second special symbol. Since the time (the elapsed time from when the game ball passes through the prize detection means 346a to when it passes through the out ball detection means 414) is longer than Tb2 (see FIG. 82), the game ball is detected by the prize detection means 346a. And the timing at which the game ball passes through the out ball detection means 414 are both in the non-addition period, and the above-described inconvenience does not occur.

  As described above, with respect to the start winning prize relating to the last symbol fluctuation before the switching of the addition / non-addition period, the passing time of the prize detecting means and the out ball detection are set by appropriately setting the fluctuation time of the final symbol fluctuation. The passage timing of the means 414 can be prevented from being divided into an addition period and a non-addition period.

  On the other hand, a prize during a change in which the first and second special symbols are in the jackpot mode (during the last symbol change before the end condition of the specific period is satisfied) or the last first and second special symbols before the special game state ends. Regarding the winning during the change in the second special symbol loss mode (the last symbol change before the start condition of the specific period is satisfied), the passing timing of the winning detecting means and the passing timing of the out ball detecting means 414 are added. It is not possible to completely prevent the period from being divided into a period and a non-addition period. The same applies to game balls passing through the out port 358.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as exemplified below, a predetermined period before the end of the addition period or before the end of the change in the last symbol change before the start of the addition period is determined by each winning detection means (excluding the large winning means 347). And the same time as the minimum value of the specific elapsed time for the out port 358.

  FIG. 84 illustrates an example in which the effect symbol 370 fluctuates in the SP reach 1 big hit fluctuation pattern during the normal gaming state (addition period). This SP reach 1 jackpot fluctuation pattern is, after the SP reach effect (a), a hit effect (b1 to b3) as to whether or not a jackpot, a winning effect (c1 to c3) relating to the jackpot, and a jackpot symbol display The symbol is determined (e) after (swing fluctuation) (d1 to d3), but the fluctuation time after the big hit symbol display (swing fluctuation) is set to the minimum value of the specific elapsed time (specific time; The time is set to a time shorter than the minimum value of the elapsed time Te1) (almost the same time may be used). Further, the fluctuation time after the winning effect is longer than the maximum value of the specific elapsed time (specific time; here, Tb2 which is the maximum value of the specific elapsed time for the second special symbol starting means 346) (may be substantially the same time). ). Note that any of Ta1 to Tg1 and Ta2 to Tg2 may be used as the minimum value and the maximum value of the specific elapsed time, respectively.

  Here, as for the white arrow and the black arrow shown in the lower part of FIG. 84, the start point indicates the passage timing of the winning detection means and the like, the end point indicates the passage timing of the out ball detection means 414, and the white arrow indicates the addition / In the case of not extending over the non-addition period, the black arrow indicates the case of extending over the addition / non-addition period. The same applies to FIGS. 85 to 87.

  In the example of FIG. 84, if the winning means is won or the ball enters the out mouth 358 after the jackpot symbol display (fluctuation fluctuation), the passing timing of the out ball detecting means 414 is after the shift to the non-addition period ([ 1], [2]). In addition, if the player wins the winning means or enters the out mouth 358 before the hit effect, which has not yet grasped whether the player has won the jackpot or not, the passing timing of the out ball detecting means 414 is set before the transition to the non-addition period. ([3], [4]).

  The period of the winning effect is a transitional period, and if the winning means is won or the ball enters the out port 358 during the winning effect, the passing timing of the out ball detecting means 414 is shifted before and after the shift to the non-addition period. Later ([5], [6]). FIG. 84 [6] shows an example in which a game ball entering the out port 358 passes through the out ball detecting means 414 during the addition period at the beginning of the winning effect. If it is late and, for example, the end of the winning effect, there is a possibility that the timing of passing through the out ball detecting means 414 is after the transition to the non-addition period (non-specific period). Similarly, FIG. 84 [5] shows an example in which a game ball that has won the ordinary winning means 350 at the end of the winning effect passes through the out-ball detecting means 414 after shifting to the non-addition period (non-specific period). However, if the winning timing of the normal winning means 350 is advanced and, for example, at the beginning of the winning effect, there is a possibility that the timing of passing through the out ball detecting means 414 is before the transition to the non-addition period (during the addition period). is there.

  FIG. 84 shows only an example of winning / entering a ball in the normal prize winning means 350 and the out mouth 358 during the winning effect ([5], [6]). In the early stage, for example, the passing timing of the game ball after winning / entering the out ball detecting means 414 for all the winning means including the second and third out ports and the out port is during the addition period (specific period). If the timing of winning / entering the ball is at the end of the winning effect, all winning means including the second and third out mouths and a part of the out mouths, for example, the second special symbol starting means 346, the normal winning With respect to the means 348 to 350, the passing timing of the game ball after the winning by the out ball detecting means 414 is after the transition to the non-addition period (non-specific period), and other, for example, the second and third out ports, the first special symbol Starting means 345 May be passing timing out ball detection means 414 of the game ball after winning / ball entrance is addition period (specific period) was about out port 358.

  In addition, the winning effect of FIG. 84 is two of “7”, which constitutes the jackpot effect mode, and “6”, which constitutes the extraordinary effect mode, as stop symbol candidates of the changing middle symbol. Two characters compete to make them appear and destroy them with a hammer (b1), and "6" is destroyed first and "7" remains (b2, b3).

  In the winning effect, the board movable body 371 operates in front of the liquid crystal display means 327 to return to the origin position (c1), and after displaying the jackpot effect mode of “7.7.7” in the center of the screen, for example (c2). Then, the effect design 370 is reduced and moved to the corner of the screen to display the animation of the content of celebrating the jackpot by the character or the like (c3), and the jackpot effect mode of “7.7.7” is displayed again, for example, in the center of the screen. (C4) Contents. Here, if the timing of winning / entering the ball is c1 to c3 of the winning effect, for example, the out ball of the game ball after winning / entering the ball for all winning means including the second and third out ports and the out port. If the passage timing of the detection means 414 is during the addition period (specific period), and the timing of winning / entering the ball is c4 of the winning effect, for example, all the winning means including the second and third out ports and the out ports are The passing timing of the game ball after winning / entering the ball by the out ball detecting means 414 may be set after the shift to the non-addition period (non-specific period). Note that, for example, the part (c1, c2) from the operation of the opening frame movable body 156 to the display of the jackpot effect mode of “7.7.7” may be included not in the winning effect but in the preceding hit effect.

  The jackpot symbol display is displayed in the center of the screen after returning to the normal screen (d1) and after an animation in which each of the “7 / 7,7” effect symbols changes (rotation, scaling, shaking, etc.) (d2). (D3). Here, by increasing the period of the big hit symbol display d1 to d3 and the symbol confirmation e, even if the winning / entering timing is any of c1 to c4 of the winning effect, for example, the second and third out ports are set. With respect to all the winning means and the out mouth, the passing timing of the game ball after winning / entering the out ball detecting means 414 may be in the addition period (specific period). Further, in the present embodiment, the period (d1) of the normal screen before each symbol is changed by the animation is also included in the big hit symbol display, but after the animation of each symbol (d2, d3) is set as the big hit symbol display, The period (d1) of the normal screen before that may be included in the winning effect.

  FIG. 85 shows an example in which the effect symbol 370 fluctuates in the SP reach 2 big hit fluctuation pattern during the normal gaming state (addition period). This SP reach 2 jackpot fluctuation pattern revived after the SP reach effect (a), the hit effect (b1 to b3) indicating whether or not a jackpot was achieved, the unselected effect (c) indicating that the hit was lost, and the jackpot. After the resurrection effect (d1 to d4) and the jackpot symbol display (swing fluctuation), the symbol is determined. The fluctuation time after the jackpot symbol display (swing fluctuation) is set to the minimum value of the specific elapsed time (specific time; here). Is set to a time shorter than Te1) which is the minimum value of the specific elapsed time for the out port 358 (may be substantially the same time). In addition, the fluctuation time after the defeat effect is longer than the maximum value of the specific elapsed time (specific time; here, Tb2 which is the maximum value of the specific elapsed time for the second special symbol starting means 346) (may be substantially the same time). ). Note that any of Ta1 to Tg1 and Ta2 to Tg2 may be used as the minimum value and the maximum value of the specific elapsed time, respectively.

  In the example of FIG. 85, when the winning means is won or the ball enters the out mouth 358 after the big hit symbol display (fluctuation fluctuation), the passing timing of the out ball detecting means 414 is after the shift to the non-addition period ([ 1], [2]). Also, if the player wins the prize winning means or hits the out port 358 before the defeated performance that does not know the jackpot, the passing timing of the out ball detecting means 414 is before the shift to the non-addition period ([ 3], [4]).

  The period of the resurrection effect is a transitional period, and when the winning means is won or the ball enters the out port 358 during the resurrection effect, the passing timing of the out ball detecting means 414 is shifted before and after the shift to the non-addition period. Later ([5], [6]). In [6] of FIG. 85, an example is shown in which the game ball entering the out port 358 passes through the out ball detecting means 414 during the addition period at the beginning of the resurrection effect. If it becomes late, for example, at the end of the resurrection effect, there is a possibility that the timing of passing through the out ball detecting means 414 is after the transition to the non-addition period (non-specific period). Similarly, FIG. 85 [5] shows an example in which a game ball that has won the normal winning means 350 at the end of the resurrection effect passes through the out-ball detecting means 414 after shifting to the non-addition period (non-specific period). However, if the winning timing of the normal winning means 350 is early and, for example, the beginning of the resurrection effect, the timing of passing through the out ball detecting means 414 may be before the transition to the non-addition period (during the addition period). is there.

  FIG. 85 shows only an example in which the normal prize winning means 350 and the out opening 358 are won / entered during the resurrection effect ([5], [6]). In the early stage, for example, the passing timing of the game ball after winning / entering the out ball detecting means 414 for all the winning means including the second and third out ports and the out port is during the addition period (specific period). If the timing of winning / entering is the end of the resurrection effect, all winning means including the second and third out mouths and a part of the out mouths, for example, the second special symbol starting means 346, the normal winning With respect to the means 348 to 350, the passing timing of the game ball after the winning by the out ball detecting means 414 is after the transition to the non-addition period (non-specific period), and other, for example, the second and third out ports, the first special symbol Starting means 345 May be passing timing out ball detection means 414 of the game ball after winning / ball entrance is addition period (specific period) was about out port 358.

  Note that the hit effect in FIG. 85 constitutes a stray effect mode other than “7”, which constitutes the big hit effect mode, as a stop symbol candidate for a changing middle symbol, similarly to the hit effect in FIG. 84. Two characters "6" appear and two characters compete for the time to destroy them with a hammer (b1), but "7" is destroyed first and "6" remains. (B2, b3). In addition, the defeated effect has a content of displaying an outgoing effect mode of “7.6.7” on a normal screen (c).

  The resurrection effect has substantially the same contents as the winning effect shown in FIG. 84. The board movable body 371 operates in front of the liquid crystal display means 327 to return to the origin position (d1), and the "7 / 7.7" jackpot effect mode Is displayed, for example, in the center of the screen (d2), and the effect design 370 is reduced and moved to the corner of the screen to display an animation of the content of celebrating the jackpot by the character or the like (d3), and "7.77.7" again. (D4) is displayed, for example, in the center of the screen. Here, if the timing of winning / entering is d1 to d3 of the resurrection effect, for example, the out ball of the game ball after winning / entering for all winning means including the second and third out ports and the out port. If the passing timing of the detecting means 414 is during the addition period (specific period) and the timing of winning / entering the ball is d4 of the resurrection effect, for example, all the winning means including the second and third out ports and the out ports are The passing timing of the game ball after winning / entering the ball by the out ball detecting means 414 may be set after the shift to the non-addition period (non-specific period).

  The big hit symbol display and the symbol determination are the same as those in FIGS. 84 (d1) to (d3) and (e). Here, even if the timing of winning / entering the ball is any of d1 to d4 of the resurrection effect by extending the period of the big hit symbol display and the symbol confirmation, for example, all winnings including the second and third out ports are performed. Regarding the means and the out mouth, the passing timing of the game ball after winning / entering the ball by the out ball detecting means 414 may be in the addition period (specific period).

  FIG. 86 shows an example in which the effect symbol 370 fluctuates in a normal deviation 1 fluctuation pattern as the final fluctuation in the time saving state (non-addition period). The normal deviation 1 fluctuation pattern is a pattern in which the left, right, and middle symbols are temporarily stopped sequentially (ad), and then the result effects (e1 to e3, f) for displaying the game result information during the time saving state. It is determined (g). The result production is composed of a result display period (f) for displaying the game result information and a result display start period (e1 to e3) before the result display period, during which the loss symbol display (fluctuation fluctuation) is performed in parallel. Done. In the example of FIG. 86, the fluctuation time after the result display period of the result effect is shorter than the minimum value of the specific elapsed time (specific time; here, Te1 which is the minimum value of the specific elapsed time relating to the out port 358). (It may be almost the same time). Further, the fluctuation time after the result display start period of the result effect is longer than the maximum value of the specific elapsed time (specific time; here, Tb2 which is the maximum value of the specific elapsed time of the second special symbol starting means 346) ( (It may be almost the same time). Note that any of Ta1 to Tg1 and Ta2 to Tg2 may be used as the minimum value and the maximum value of the specific elapsed time, respectively.

  In the example of FIG. 86, when the winning means is won or the ball enters the out mouth 358 after the result display period of the result effect, the passing timing of the out ball detecting means 414 is after shifting to the addition period ([1]). , [2]). Also, if the winning means is won or the ball enters the out port 358 before the final symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped), the passing timing of the out ball detecting means 414 is before the transition to the addition period ([3], [Four]). Then, the result display start period in the result effect is a transition period, and when the prize means is won or the ball enters the out port 358 during the result display start period, the passing timing of the out ball detection means 414 is changed to the addition period. Either before migration or after migration ([5], [6]).

  In the result presentation of FIG. 86, a change period from the start of the result display until the final numerical value is displayed is a result display period (e1 to e3), and a period in which the final numerical value is displayed as the result display. (F) is the result display period. During this result production, the design of “6.7.7” which is the outlying production mode is reduced and displayed in a temporarily stopped state (e1 to e3) and completely stopped (f) by the end of the result production. I have.

  FIG. 87 shows an example of a case where the effect symbol 370 fluctuates in the normal deviation two fluctuation pattern as the final fluctuation during the time saving state (non-addition period). This normal deviation 2 fluctuation pattern is a result effect (e1 to e3, f, g1, g2) in which the left, right, and middle symbols are temporarily stopped (ad), and the game result information is displayed during the time saving state. Then, the symbol is determined via the normal screen (h). The result effect is composed of a result display period (f) for displaying the game result information, a result display start period (e1 to e3) before that, and a final end display period (g1, g2). In addition, out-of-design symbols (shake fluctuations) are displayed in parallel from the result effect to the normal screen. In the example of FIG. 87, the fluctuation time after the normal screen is set to a time shorter than the minimum value of the specific elapsed time (specific time; here, Te1 which is the minimum value of the specific elapsed time for the out port 358) (even if the time is substantially the same). Good). Also, the fluctuation time after the end display period of the result effect is longer than the maximum value of the specific elapsed time (specific time; here, Tb2 which is the maximum value of the specific elapsed time for the second special symbol starting means 346) (approximately). (It may be the same time). Note that any of Ta1 to Tg1 and Ta2 to Tg2 may be used as the minimum value and the maximum value of the specific elapsed time, respectively.

  In the example of FIG. 87, if the winning means is won or the ball enters the out mouth 358 after the normal screen after the result effect, the passing timing of the out ball detecting means 414 is after the transition to the addition period ([1]). , [2]). Also, if the winning means is won or the ball enters the out port 358 before the final symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped), the passing timing of the out ball detecting means 414 is before the transition to the addition period ([3], [Four]). The result production period is a transition period, and when the prize means is won or the ball enters the out mouth 358 during the result production, the passing timing of the out ball detection means 414 is before and after the transition to the addition period. ([5], [6]).

  In the result presentation of FIG. 87, a change period from the start of the result display until the final numerical value is displayed is a result display period (e1 to e3), and a period during which the final numerical value is displayed as the result display. Is a result display period (f), for example, a period in which the screen is blacked out and “END” is displayed is defined as an end display period (g1, g2). During the result display start period of the result effect, the symbol “6.7.7”, which is an outgoing effect mode, is reduced and displayed in a temporarily stopped state, and is completely stopped by the end of the result display period.

  FIG. 88 shows the main commands transmitted from the main control board 415a to the effect control board 416a in the power-on processing described above, and the transmission order of the main commands, "setting change", "RAM clear", "setting confirmation". , “Backup restoration”, and “RAM abnormality” for each of the five processing modes. As is clear from FIG. 88, the setting change start command (BA76H) and the setting change end command (BA77H) in “setting change”, the setting check start command (BA60H) and the setting check end command (BA67H) in “setting check”. , The power-on command (BA7FH) in “RAM abnormality” is transmitted only in each processing mode, but the other commands are transmitted in common in a plurality of processing modes.

  Next, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 89) of the main control board 415a will be described. In the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 89), first, a power supply abnormality check processing (S81) is executed. This power supply abnormality check processing (S81) is common to the power supply abnormality check processing shown in FIG. As described above, by sharing the power supply abnormality check processing between the power-on processing and the timer interrupt processing, it is possible to further reduce the program capacity.

  When the power supply abnormality check processing (S81) is completed, a timer management processing (S82) for managing various timers used for the game control is performed, and information detected by various sensors such as a prize detection means and an operation means provided in each prize means is obtained. An input management process for managing (S83), a setting error check process for performing an error check on a set value (S84), an error management process for monitoring the occurrence of various errors (S85), a random number update for updating various random numbers such as a jackpot determination random number. Processing (S86), a prize ball management process (S87) for performing prize ball management such as transmitting a payout control command to the payout control board 425a is executed.

  Here, in the timer management process (S82), for example, a subtraction process of an operation check timer is also performed. The subtraction process of the operation check timer is performed until the value of the operation check timer becomes 0, for example. The operation confirmation timer is a value obtained by adding 1 to the timer value corresponding to the operation confirmation time (here, 4800 ms) as the initial value in the work area initial setting processing (Sk12 in FIG. 76) in the common processing at power-on (S22). Specifically, since 1201 is set, 1 is subtracted in the first timer management process (S82) after the power is turned on, and the value becomes 1200 corresponding to 4800 ms.

  Further, following the prize ball management process (S87), a normal symbol management process (S88), a normal electric accessory management process (S89), a special symbol management process (S90), and a special electric accessory management process (S91). Execute.

  The ordinary symbol management process (S88) is for managing the variation of the ordinary symbol by the ordinary symbol display means 361. Based on the fact that the ordinary symbol starting means 344 detects the game ball, the ordinary random number information such as a hit determination random number value or the like is determined. And stores the ordinary random number information in a first-in, first-out storage area up to a predetermined upper limit holding number (for example, four), so that the ordinary symbol display means 361 is in a state capable of variable display and one or more Under the condition that the ordinary random number information is stored (the number of ordinary reservations is 1 or more), the first hit judgment random value is extracted from the queue of the ordinary random information, and the hit judgment random value is determined in advance. The hit / miss judgment (hit judgment) is performed in accordance with whether or not the hit judgment value is coincident with the hit judgment value. Select stop symbol and varies with time, and performs a variation of the normal symbol by normal symbol display unit 361.

  The ordinary electric auditors management process (S89) manages the ordinary profit state, and the stopped symbol after the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol display means 361 is determined based on the hit determination result in S88. When this happens, a normal profit state is generated in which the opening / closing section 346b of the second special symbol starting means 346 is changed to an open state according to a predetermined opening / closing pattern.

  The special symbol management process (S90) manages the fluctuation of the first and second special symbols by the first and second special symbol display means 363 and 364, and the first and second special symbol starting means 345 and 346 are used. Based on the detection of a game ball, first and second special random number information including a jackpot determination random number value, a jackpot symbol random number value, and other random number values are obtained, and the first and second special random number information are determined in advance. The upper limit reserved number (for example, four each) is stored in a first-in first-out type storage area as a limit, and when the first and second special symbol display means 363 and 364 are in a state capable of variably displaying, the second special symbol is displayed. If the reserved number is 1 or more, the first jackpot determination random number value is taken out of the queue of the second special random number information from the queue of the second special random number information, and if only the first special reserved number is 1 or more, it is taken out of the queue of the first special random number information. That big hit A jackpot / losing judgment is made at a predetermined jackpot probability by a random number lottery using a judgment random number value, and according to the jackpot judgment result, a stop symbol mode of the first and second special symbols, a variation pattern of the effect symbol, and the like. After the determination, the first and second special symbol display means 363 and 364 change the first and second special symbols.

  The special electric accessory management processing (S91) is for managing a jackpot game, and the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, and the stop symbol after the first and second special symbol display means 363, 364 is changed is a jackpot mode (specification). In this case, a jackpot game (first and second special profit states) in which the open / close plate 347b of the special winning means 347 is changed to an open state according to a predetermined opening pattern is generated. Note that the main control board 415a that executes the special electric auditors product management process (S91) constitutes a jackpot game execution unit (special game execution unit) that executes a jackpot game (special game).

  Subsequent to the special electric accessory management process (S91), an external terminal process (S92) and an LED management process (S93) are executed. In the external terminal process (S92), a process for outputting various information from an external output terminal to an external device such as a hall computer is performed. In the present embodiment, for example, an initial value (for example, a value corresponding to 30 seconds) is set in the fraudulent information timer at the start of the setting confirmation processing (S20), but in this external terminal processing (S92). The security signal is output from the external output terminal until the value becomes 0 (that is, for example, until 30 seconds elapse) while subtracting the illegal information timer.

  In the LED management process (S93), the light emission of LEDs constituting the game information display means 326, the performance display means 435 (performance information display means 433), and the like is managed. In the present embodiment, the drive control of the game information display means 326 and the performance information display means 433 is performed by the dynamic lighting method.

  In the LED management process (S93), as shown in FIG. 90, first, a clear signal is output to the LED common port and the LED data port to clear the port (S101), and the LED output counter is incremented (S102). Then, the common data corresponding to the value of the LED output counter is selected from the LED common output selection table (FIG. 91A) (S103), and the common data is output to the LED common port (S104).

  In the LED common output selection table of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 91A and 63, first common data for turning on the common C0 and the common C4, and turning on the common C1 and the common C5. Four types of common data are provided: a second common data, a third common data for turning on the commons C2 and C6, and a fourth common data for turning on the commons C3 and C7. The first to fourth common data are cyclically selected in that order in accordance with the increase of the LED output counter.

  Thereby, at every interruption (here, every 4 ms), the lighting target of the game information display means 326 sequentially changes in the order of the LED group 326a → 326b → 326c → 326d → 326a →... The lighting target of the performance information display means 433) changes sequentially in the order of the 7-segment display section 433a → 433b → 433c → 433d → 433a →.

  Subsequently, for the LED output counter, the value of the fifth bit when the least significant bit is the 0th bit is determined (S105), and two LED data output information tables A and B (FIG. )) Is selected (S106a, 106b). Thus, the LED data output information table can be switched every 32 interrupts (128 ms). Of course, it is arbitrary how many times the LED data output information table is switched during the interruption.

  Here, the LED data output information tables A and B correspond to the LED data port 1 connected to the game information display means 326 and, as shown in FIG. 91, correspond to the first to fourth common data, respectively. First to fourth LED data A0 to A3, B0 to B3 are provided. That is, the first LED data A0, B0 are LED data of the LED group 326a (first special symbol display means 363) of the game information display means 326 corresponding to the common C0, and the second LED data A1, B1 are the common C1. The LED data 326b (second special symbol display means 364) of the corresponding game information display means 326 is LED data, and the third LED data A2, B2 is the LED group 326c (special) of the game information display means 326 corresponding to the common C2. The fourth LED data A3 and B3 are LED data of the LED group 326d of the game information display means 326 (such as the ordinary symbol display means 361) corresponding to the common C3.

  When one of the LED data output information tables A and B is selected (S106a, S106b), the LED data corresponding to the value of the LED output counter is selected from the LED data output information table (S107), and the LED data is converted to the LED data. The data is output to the port 1 (S108), and the LED management processing ends.

  By the above processing, the four LED groups 326a to 326d of the game information display means 326 can be turned on while being sequentially switched every 4 ms, and two kinds of display modes can be switched in the same group every 128 ms.

  Returning to the timer interrupt processing of FIG. 89, the description will be continued. When the above-described LED management processing (S93) ends, the contents of all registers are saved in the stack area (S94), and then performance display update processing (S95) for performing display by the performance display means 435 is executed. In the performance display update processing (S95), after the performance display means 435 performs an operation confirmation display for repeating all lighting and all extinguishing for a predetermined operation confirmation time (for example, about 5 seconds), the performance display totaling division processing (FIG. A plurality of base value display periods (real-time base values) in which the plurality of types of base values (here, four types of real-time base values and first to third cumulative base values) calculated in S63) are displayed on the performance display means 435. The display period and the first to third cumulative base value display periods are cyclically switched every predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds, here 4.8 seconds).

  As described above, since the operation confirmation display of the performance display unit 435 is performed in the LED interrupt processing (S93) of the timer interrupt, the start timing is set display for a predetermined time (for example, about 1 second) after the end of the setting change. This is after the end of the setting change confirmation display by the means 434. After the operation confirmation display of the performance display means 435, the base value may be displayed only for a predetermined period, for example, when the door (front frame 3) is open, or when a predetermined condition other than the lapse of time is satisfied ( For example, when a button operation is performed), a plurality of base value display periods may be switched.

  The four 7-segment display units 433a to 433d (FIGS. 3 and 63) constituting the performance display unit 435 include, for example, the upper 2 digits of the 7-segment display units 433d and 433c. An identification display section for indicating the third cumulative base value, etc., and a 7-segment display section 433b, 433a of the lower two digits constitute a numerical value display section for displaying a numerical value of the base value.

  The base value is measured for each unit measurement period until the total number of outs reaches a predetermined number (here, 60000), but during the first unit measurement period after the first power-on, the power is turned on. Instead of starting from time, it starts after a predetermined pre-measurement period has elapsed (for example, when the total number of outs reaches a predetermined number (here, 300)).

  During the real-time base value display period, for example, “bL.” Indicating the real-time base value is displayed on the identification display unit, and the real-time base value at the start of or immediately before the real-time base value display period is displayed on the numerical display unit, for example. However, depending on whether the total number of outs in the unit measurement period at that time has reached a predetermined threshold (for example, 6000), if the display mode of “bL.” It is made to be. The base value is displayed on the numerical display after rounding off the first decimal place, for example. When the value after rounding is 3 digits or more, "99." or the like indicating an overflow is displayed on the numerical display. I do.

  During the first to third cumulative base value display periods, for example, “b1.” To “b3.” Indicating the first to third cumulative base values are displayed on the identification display unit, and the numerical display unit displays the values. The first to third cumulative base values at the time are displayed. If the first to third cumulative base values have not been obtained yet, for example, "b1." To "b3." At the same time, "-" is displayed on the numerical value display section. For example, since the first to third cumulative base values are not obtained until the first unit measurement period after the first power-on, the performance display means during the first to third cumulative base value display periods The display of 435 is "b1 .--" to "b3 .--".

  During the pre-measurement period before the first unit measurement period starts (the total number of outs is less than 300), for example, "bL.", "B1." To "b3." For example, “−−” is lit on the numerical value display section.

  In the performance display update process (S95), as shown in FIG. 92, first, all registers are evacuated (S111), and the display update process (S112) performs display in the identification display unit output buffer and the numerical value display unit output buffer, respectively. The pattern data is set, and in the subsequent display data output process (S113), the display pattern data set in the identification display unit output buffer and the numerical value display unit output buffer is changed to the common (FIG. 90) selected in the LED management process (FIG. 90). By outputting to the LED data port 2 (FIG. 63) according to the 7-segment display section, a predetermined display is performed on the performance display means 435. Then, a test shot test signal output process (S114) is executed, all registers are restored (S115), and the process ends.

  Hereinafter, the processing procedure of the display update processing (S112) will be described as time elapses with reference to time charts in FIGS. 98 to 100 as appropriate. In the display update process (S112), as shown in FIG. 93, first, only when the display update process is executed for the first time after the power is turned on (S121: Yes), various kinds of information (operations) related to the display of the performance display unit 435 are performed. Initial setting of the first information excluding the confirmation timer is performed (S122). Although various methods are conceivable for the determination in S121, in the present embodiment, the determination is made based on whether the value of the operation check timer is 4800 ms, specifically, 1200. In the operation confirmation timer of the present embodiment, a value obtained by adding 1 to a timer value corresponding to 4800 ms as an initial value in the work area initial setting process at power-on (Sk12 in FIG. 76), specifically, 1201 is set. Then, since 1 is subtracted in the first timer management process (S82) thereafter, the value of the operation confirmation timer is 1200 corresponding to 4800 ms at the time of the first display update process (S112) after the power is turned on.

  In S122, for example, 0 is set in the blinking cycle timer, 15 is set in the lighting / light-out switching counter, a predetermined non-start value is set in the total division counter, 4 is set in the display content pointer, and the identification display unit output buffer and The light-off data (0000H) is set in the numerical value display section output buffers. Here, the blinking cycle timer is for counting the blinking cycle, the lighting / light-off switching counter is for switching between lighting and light-off during blinking, and the tallying division counter is counting in the performance display tallying and dividing process (S63). This is for specifying the timing for calculating the real-time base value using the value. The display content pointer is used to specify the display content of the performance display means 435, that is, the type of the base value. For example, the real-time base value and the values 1 to 4 corresponding to the first to third cumulative base values are used. To take.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the first information related to the display of the performance display unit 435, that is, the blinking cycle timer, the lighting / light-off switching counter, the total division counter, and the display content pointer are configured to be initialized after the power is turned on. Therefore, for example, each time the power is turned on, the lighting / extinguishing state when the operation check display is started does not change, and the type of the base value displayed first after the operation check display does not change. The state at the start of display of the performance display means 435 after the input can be always the same.

  In the present embodiment, of the predetermined information related to the display of the performance display means 435, the operation check timer is initialized in the power-on process before the interrupt process is started (Sk12), and the other first information is set. For example, since the initial settings of the blinking cycle timer, the on / off switching counter, the total division counter, and the display content pointer are performed by interrupt processing (S122), the processing time at power-on is short, and quick startup is possible. is there.

  Note that the blinking cycle timer, the lighting / light-off switching counter, the total division counter, and the display content pointer are stored in the out-of-area RAM (second storage area). Therefore, if the out-of-area RAM check processing (FIG. 80) determines that the out-of-area RAM is abnormal (S71: Yes), the operation confirmation timer stored in the in-area RAM is not cleared, but the out-of-area RAM is not cleared. Are cleared, the blinking cycle timer, the light-on / light-off switching counter, the tallying division counter, the display content pointer, and the like stored in the memory are cleared.

  Subsequently, the blinking cycle timer is incremented (S123), and it is determined whether the value of the blinking cycle timer after the addition is equal to or more than a predetermined value (here, 75 corresponding to 0.3 seconds) (S124). If the value of the blinking cycle timer is less than the predetermined value (S124: No), the display update processing ends here. If the value of the blinking cycle timer is equal to or more than the predetermined value (here, 75) in S124 (S124: Yes), the blinking cycle timer is cleared (S125), and the processing of S126 and thereafter is executed. As described above, the processing after S125 is executed every time the blinking cycle timer reaches the predetermined value of 75, that is, for example, every 0.3 seconds (= 4 ms × 75).

  In the above-described S122, the turn-off data (0000H) is set as an initial value in the identification display unit output buffer and the numerical value display unit output buffer, respectively. For about 0.3 seconds (until the predetermined value is reached) (T1 to T2 in FIG. 98), the performance display unit 435 is in the completely unlit state.

  Subsequent to S125, the ON / OFF switching counter is incremented (S126), and it is determined whether the value of the ON / OFF switching counter after the addition is an even number or an odd number (S127). The process proceeds to S131 in FIG. 94, and if it is an odd number, the process proceeds to S141 in FIG. That is, for example, every time 0.3 seconds elapse, the processing after S131 shown in FIG. 94 and the processing after S141 shown in FIG. 95 are alternately performed.

  In the present embodiment, 15 is set as the initial value in the lighting / light-off switching counter in S122, so that in the first time S127 (T2 in FIG. 98) after the power is turned on, the lighting / light-off switching counter becomes an even number (= 16), The process moves to S131 in FIG. Since the light-on / light-off switching counter at this time is 16 and is a predetermined value (here, 15) or more, the light-on / light-off switching counter is cleared in S131 and becomes 0 (see FIG. 98). Since the value of the operation check timer at this point is 1126 (see FIG. 98) and is not 0 (S132: No), the lighting data (FFFFH) is set in each of the identification display unit output buffer and the numerical value display unit output buffer. (S133, S134), and the display update process ends here. As a result, the performance display means 435 switches from the all-off state to the all-on state. The lighting data in S133 and S134 is directly written into each output buffer without referring to a data table or the like.

  In the display update process 0.3 seconds after that, the light-on / light-off switching counter after the addition in S126 becomes 1 (T3 in FIG. 98), so it is determined to be an odd number in S127, and the flow shifts to S141 in FIG. 95. Since the value of the operation confirmation timer at this time is 1051 (see FIG. 98) and is not 0 (S141: No), the light-off data (0000H) is set in the identification display unit output buffer and the numerical value display unit output buffer, respectively. (S142, S143). As a result, the performance display means 435 switches from the all-lit state to the all-lit state. Note that the light-off data in S142 and S143 is also written directly to each output buffer without referring to a data table or the like. At this time, the value of the lighting / light-out switching counter is 1 and is not the predetermined value (here, 15) (S147: No), and thus the display update processing ends here.

  The above processing is repeated until the lighting / light-out switching counter after the addition in S126 reaches 15 (T4 in FIG. 98). Then, when the lighting / light-out switching counter after the addition in S126 becomes 15 (T5 in FIG. 98), it is determined to be an odd number in S127, and the process shifts to S141 in FIG. 95. Since it is 1 (see FIG. 98) and not 0, in S142 and S143, turn-off data (0000H) is set in the identification display unit output buffer and the numerical value display unit output buffer, respectively. As a result, the performance display means 435 switches from the all-lit state to the all-lit state.

  Then, since the light-on / light-off switching counter at this time is 15, the determination in subsequent S147 is Yes, and the processing of S148 to S151 is executed. That is, 1 is added to the display content pointer (S148), and 1 is set to the display content pointer on condition that the display content pointer after the addition is a predetermined value (here, 5) or more (S149: Yes). (S150). In the present embodiment, since the display content pointer is set to 4 as an initial value in S122, the value of the display content pointer after the addition in S148 is 5, it is determined in S149 that the value is equal to or more than the predetermined value, and the display is performed in S150. 1 is set to the content pointer. Then, the start value is set in the totalization division counter (S151), and the display update processing ends.

  When the start value is set to the total division counter, a division process for calculating a real-time base value using the count value at that time is performed in the performance display total division process (S63 in FIG. 79). When the real-time base value is calculated, the non-start value is set in the total division counter. Note that there may be cases where the real-time base value is not calculated even if the start value is set in the total division counter, for example, during a pre-measurement period in which the real-time base value is not displayed.

  In the display updating process 0.3 seconds after that, the lighting / light-out switching counter after the addition in S126 is 16 (T6 in FIGS. 98 and 99), so it is determined that the number is an even number in S127, and in S131 in FIG. , The on / off switching counter is cleared to zero. At this point, the operation check timer has already been set to 0 (S132: Yes), so that the operation check display is ended, and the processing of S135 to S138 is executed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the operation confirmation display for switching the performance display unit 435 from all-off to all-on every predetermined time (0.3 seconds) is displayed for about 5.1 seconds (= T1 to T6 in FIG. 98). 0.3 seconds × 17).

  In S135 to S138, first, the identification display unit display pattern data corresponding to the display content pointer is acquired from the identification display unit LED data table (S135), and the acquired identification display unit display pattern data is set in the identification display unit output buffer. (S136). As shown in FIG. 96 (a), the identification display section LED data table stores "bL.", "B1.", "B2.", "B3." . Is stored in advance. At this point, the value of the display content pointer is 1 (see FIG. 99), so that the display pattern data corresponding to the display of “bL.” Is set in the identification display unit output buffer.

  Further, from the decimal numerical LED data table, the numerical display unit display pattern data corresponding to the display content on the numerical display unit is obtained (S137), and the obtained numerical display unit display pattern data is set in the numerical display unit output buffer. (S138). The display content on the numerical value display unit is determined based on the display content pointer and the section pointer, for example, as shown in FIG. Here, the section pointer indicates a period related to measurement of the base value. For example, as shown in FIG. 97, a “pre-measurement period”, followed by a “first unit measurement period”, a “second unit measurement period”, “ The value takes one of values 1 to 5 corresponding to the five types of periods of “third unit measurement period” and “after the fourth unit measurement period”. As shown in FIG. 96 (b), the decimal value LED data table contains 10 types of numbers “0” to “9” and 1-byte display pattern data corresponding to “−” in advance. Is stored.

  At this time (T6 in FIG. 99), the display content pointer is 1 and the section pointer is likely to be 1 (pre-measurement period). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 97, the display content of the numerical value display unit is “ −− ”. Therefore, "01000000B" corresponding to the tens place "-" and "01000000B" corresponding to the ones place "-" are obtained from the decimal value LED data table and set in the numerical value display section output buffer. Is done.

  As described above, the real-time base value display period (pre-measurement period) starts at the time T6 (the end of the operation check display) in FIGS. -".

  In the display update process 0.3 seconds later (T7 in FIG. 99), the on / off switching counter after the addition in S126 becomes 1, and it is determined in S127 that the number is an odd number. Since the value of the operation check timer is determined to be 0 in S141 of FIG. 95 (S141: Yes), it is determined in subsequent S144 whether the display mode of the identification display unit is lighting or blinking. Under the condition that the determination result is blinking (S145: Yes), light-out data (0000H) is set in the identification display unit output buffer (S146). Thereby, the display of the identification display unit is switched from, for example, “bL.” To the light-off state. Since the value of the output buffer of the numerical value display unit is not updated, the display of the numerical value display unit remains unchanged, for example, from “−−”.

  The above processing is repeated until the lighting / light-out switching counter after the addition in S126 reaches 16 (T8 in FIG. 99). When the lighting / light-out switching counter after the addition in S126 becomes 15 (T8 in FIG. 99), the determination in S147 in FIG. 95 becomes Yes, and the display content pointer is changed from 1 by the processing in S148 to S151. At the same time, the start value is set to the total division counter.

  As a result, 0.3 seconds later (T9 in FIG. 99), the real-time base value display period ends and a new first total base value display period starts. It becomes a blinking state, and for example, “-−” is lit on the numerical value display section.

  FIG. 100 shows a performance display in a case where the section pointer is 3 (second unit measurement period) and the display content pointer is 2 (first cumulative base value display period), as an example of a case where the display mode of the identification display unit is lit. The display state of the means 435 is shown. When the section pointer is 3 and the display pointer is 2, the display mode of the identification display section is lit (FIG. 97). In the display unit output buffer, the identification display unit display pattern data corresponding to “b1.” Is set, and in the numerical display unit output buffer, the numerical display unit display pattern data corresponding to the first cumulative base value at that time is set (S135). If the value of the lighting / light-out switching counter after addition in S126 is an odd number, neither the identification display unit output buffer nor the numerical value display unit output buffer is updated. Therefore, during the first cumulative base value display period from T10 to T11 in FIG. 100, "b1." Is lit on the identification display unit, and the first cumulative base value at that time is lit on the numerical value display unit. .

  Then, when the display pointer changes from 2 to 3 and the second cumulative base value display period starts (T11 in FIG. 100), the display mode of the identification display unit blinks (FIG. 97). When the value of the later ON / OFF switching counter is an even number, the identification display section output pattern data corresponding to “b2.” Is stored in the identification display section output buffer, and “−−” is displayed in the numeric display section output buffer. Corresponding numerical display section display pattern data is set (S135 to S138), and if the value of the on / off switching counter after addition in S126 is an odd number, off-data (0000H) is set in the identification display section output buffer. (S146). Therefore, during the second cumulative base value display period of T11 to T11 in FIG. 100, "b2." Is blinkingly displayed on the identification display portion, and "-" is lit on the numerical value display portion.

  Also, if an abnormality occurs in the out-of-area RAM during the operation confirmation display (T1 to T6 in FIG. 98) (S71: Yes in FIG. 80), the out-of-area RAM is cleared (S72), but the operation confirmation timer does not operate. It is not cleared because it is stored in the internal RAM. Therefore, the operation check display is not interrupted and is continued at least until the value of the operation check timer reaches zero. However, in this case, the blinking cycle timer, the lighting / light-off switching counter, the display content pointer, and the like (first information) stored in the out-of-region RAM are cleared. (The timing at which the value (75) is reached) may change. Further, when the display content pointer is cleared, the first display content after the operation confirmation display may change.

  Returning to the timer interrupt processing of FIG. 89, the description will be continued. When the performance display updating process (S95) described above ends, the contents of the saved register are restored (S96), the WDT is cleared (S97), and the timer interrupt process ends.

  Subsequently, a control operation of the effect control board 416a will be described. The effect control board 416a is effected by various effect means such as liquid crystal display means 327, illumination means 436, speakers 17, 30a, 30b, 31a, 31b, frame movable effect means 153, operation effect means 232, and panel movable effect means 328. As shown in FIG. 62 (b), a power-on control unit 441, a special reserved number display control unit 442, a symbol variation effect control unit 443, an error notification control unit 444, and the like are provided.

  The power-on control means 441 controls various effect means such as the liquid crystal display means 327 based on receiving various control commands from the main control board 415a when the power is turned on.

  101 and 102 show the main received commands from the main control board 415a and the corresponding operation contents of the liquid crystal display means 327, the illumination means 436, the speaker 17, etc., the movable effect means 153, 328, etc. for each processing mode. 101 shows the case of "RAM clear" and "setting change", and FIG. 102 shows the case of "backup restoration", "setting check", and "RAM abnormality".

  When the RAM is cleared, as shown in FIG. 101, when a power-on command (FA08H) is received, character information such as "Please Wait" is displayed on the liquid crystal display means 327. The light is turned off, the sound of BGM or the like is not output from the speaker 17 or the like (silence), and the movable effect means 153 and 328 or the like maintain the state stopped at the origin position, for example (no change). Then, when the initialization command (BA01H) is received thereafter, the liquid crystal display means 327, the illuminating means 436, the speaker 17 and the like continue to the previous state, but the movable effect means 153 and 328 and the like perform the initial operation ( (Initialization operation) is started.

  Then, when the RAM clear command (BA02H) is received, a predetermined symbol mode, for example, “2.3.7” (low-precision screen) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 327 by the effect symbol 370, and all the illumination devices 436 are displayed. The lamp 17 is turned on, a predetermined RAM clear sound is output from the speaker 17 and the like, and the movable effect means 153 and 328 and the like continue their state (initial operation).

  After that, when the customer waiting command (BA04H) is received, the display on the liquid crystal display means 327 is continued until the demonstration display is started after elapse of, for example, 180 seconds, and the illumination means 436 emits light in a predetermined customer waiting pattern, for example. Then, the BGM output from the speaker 17 and the like is continued until the fade-out occurs after elapse of 30 seconds, for example, and the state of the movable effect means 153 and 328 and the like is continued.

  As for the setting change, as shown in FIG. 101, when the power-on command (FA08H) is received, the same processing as when the RAM is cleared is performed, and then the setting change start command (BA76H) is received. In addition to displaying character information such as “setting is being changed” indicating that the setting is being changed on the liquid crystal display means 327, the illumination means 436 emits light in a predetermined setting changing pattern, for example, and Although a predetermined setting change sound is output, the state of the movable effect means 153, 328, and the like is continued. Then, when the setting change end command (BA77H) is received thereafter, for example, all of the liquid crystal display means 327, the illumination means 436, the speaker 17, etc., the movable effect means 153, 328, etc., maintain the previous state. When the setting change end command (BA77H) is received, the character information such as “Setting is being changed” displayed on the liquid crystal display means 327 is erased, and the illumination of the illumination means 436 in the setting changing pattern is terminated. And the output of the setting change sound from the speaker 17 or the like may be stopped. The effect of each effect means at the time of receiving the subsequent initialization command (BA01H), RAM clear command (BA02H) and waiting for customer command (BA04H) is the same as that at the time of RAM clear.

  When the backup is restored, as shown in FIG. 102, when the power-on command (FA08H) and the initialization command (BA01H) are received, the same processing as that performed when the RAM is cleared is performed. ) Is displayed on the liquid crystal display means 327 to display text information such as "Recovered from a power failure, please restart the game" to prompt the game to be restarted. Is maintained, the mute state is maintained for the speaker 17 and the like, and the initial operation is continued for the movable effect means 153 and 328, for example. Thereafter, when the first and second special reserved number designation commands (B0xxH, B1xxH), the set value command (F6xxH), and the state designation commands (FAxxH to FDxxH) are received, for example, the liquid crystal display unit 327, the illumination unit 436, and the speaker 17 are received. The state of the movable effect means 153, 328, etc., is maintained. Then, when the waiting-for-customer command (BA04H) is received, the liquid crystal display means 327 displays the predetermined symbol pattern by the effect symbol 370 until the demonstration display is started after elapse of, for example, 180 seconds, for example, “2.3.7” (low). Screen), the illumination means 436 emits light in, for example, a predetermined customer waiting pattern, and the BGM output from the speaker 17 or the like is continued until fade-out after elapse of 30 seconds, for example, and the movable production means 153 and 328 Continue the previous state.

  When the backup is restored, the game is restored in the state before the power failure. For example, if the information of the special symbol indicated by the game information display means 326 before the power failure is in the state of the big hit stop, even after the backup is restored. It will return in a jackpot stop mode. Here, when the setting change process is executed, after the RAM clearing process, as the information of the special symbol indicated by the game information display means 326, a value indicating a stop mode of a loss, a value indicating non-lighting, or another specific value If (display mode not used during the game) is set, there is a contradiction with the display mode of the special symbol at the time of the restoration of the backup, and thereby the backup is restored (that is, non-setting change), or the setting change process is performed. It becomes possible for the player to determine whether or not the game is complete. This is not limited to the special symbol information indicated by the game information display means 326, and the same can be said for the normal symbol information. Therefore, when the backup is restored, the information on whether or not the special symbol is changing is checked, and when it is determined that the special symbol is not changing, the display mode of the special symbol indicated by the game information display means 326 is changed when the setting is changed. Even if the special symbol information indicated by the game information display means 326 at the time of backup restoration is a display mode indicating a hit, a value indicating the stop mode of the loss or a non-lighting state is set by setting the same stop mode as the above. , And other specific values (display modes not used during the game), so that there is no inconsistency with when the setting change process is performed.

  Here, the reason for confirming the information on whether the special symbol is changing is that if the special symbol is changing, the information of the changing special symbol is rewritten to be out of order. This is because if the change is a hit change, a contradiction that the hit is displayed in an out-of-hit mode is generated. Such a contradiction cannot be said to satisfy a standard that can be provided to the market as a gaming machine, and is an event that must never occur. In this way, when a specific condition (such as during non-fluctuation or waiting for a customer) is satisfied with reference to the information on the special symbol when the backup is restored, the information on the special symbol in the game information display means 326 is rewritten. In this way, the same information is displayed when the backup is restored when a specific condition (the state before the power failure is not fluctuating or waiting for a customer) is satisfied, and when the RAM is cleared or the setting is changed. 326 can be designated as a special symbol display mode, making it difficult to determine whether the setting change processing has been performed. In addition, not limited to the information of the special symbol, a similar configuration may be adopted by referring to whether or not a customer waiting state that can occur only while the special symbol is not fluctuating. In addition, it is desirable that not only special symbols but also ordinary symbols indicated by the game information display means 326 have the same configuration. As a result, it is possible to configure the normal symbol as well as the special symbol so that there is no inconsistency in the display mode when the backup is restored and when the setting is changed.

  As for the setting confirmation, as shown in FIG. 102, when the power-on command (FA08H) is received, the same processing as in the RAM clear is performed, and then, when the setting confirmation start command (BA60H) is received. The liquid crystal display means 327 displays character information such as "setting is being confirmed" indicating that the setting is being confirmed, and makes the illumination means 436 emit light in a predetermined setting confirming pattern, for example. Although a predetermined setting confirmation sound is output, the state of the movable effect means 153, 328 and the like is continued. Thereafter, when the setting confirmation end command (BA67H) is received, for example, all of the liquid crystal display means 327, the illumination means 436, the speaker 17, the movable effect means 153, 328, etc., maintain their previous states. Then, an initialization command (BA01H), a power failure recovery display command (BA03H), first and second special reserved quantity designation commands (B0xxH, B1xxH), a set value command (F6xxH), a state designation command (FAxxH to FDxxH), and a customer waiting The effect form of each effect means at the time of receiving the middle command (BA04H) is the same as that at the time of backup restoration. For example, when the setting confirmation end command (BA67H) is received, the character information such as “setting is being confirmed” displayed on the liquid crystal display means 327 is erased, and the illumination of the illumination means 436 in the setting confirmation pattern is terminated. Then, the output of the setting confirmation sound from the speaker 17 or the like may be stopped.

  In the case of a RAM abnormality, as shown in FIG. 102, when the power-on command (FA08H) is received, the same processing as that performed when the RAM is cleared is performed, and then the power-on command (BA7FH) is received. , The character information such as "RAM error Re-power on and set the setting to 1" is displayed to prompt the liquid crystal display means 327 to turn on the power again. The effect means 153, 328, etc. are maintained in their previous state.

  The special reserved number display control means 442 controls the display of the first and second special reserved numbers on the liquid crystal display means 327, and responds to the increase and decrease of the first and second special reserved numbers by the first special reserved number. Corresponding to the number of first reserved images X1 to X4 (up to four), the number of second reserved images Y1 to Y4 (up to four), and the first and second special symbols that are changing Is displayed on the liquid crystal display means 327.

  In this embodiment, since the reserved storage of the second special symbol is preferentially digested over the reserved storage of the first special symbol, the second special symbol side is also given priority to the reserved display, as shown in FIG. The second reserved images Y1 to Y4 are partially overlapped and displayed in front of the reserved images X1 to X4. When a hold addition command relating to the first and second special hold numbers is received from the main control board 415a, one additional first and second hold images X1 and Y1 are displayed at the end of the queue. Further, when receiving the hold subtraction command related to the first and second special hold numbers from the main control board 415a, the first and second hold images X1 and Y1 are shifted one by one toward the front side of the queue. At the same time as shifting, the extruded first and second reserved images X1 and Y1 are moved to, for example, a predetermined position to be changed to the fluctuating reserved image Z.

  The symbol fluctuation effect control means 443 performs display control of the effect symbol 370 and the accompanying control of the movable body operation, voice output, illumination light emission, and the like. Based on the fluctuation pattern scenario corresponding to the performed fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation effect of the effect symbol 370 on the liquid crystal display means 327 and the accompanying movable body operation, audio output, illumination light emission, and the fluctuation stop command are received. Sometimes, the variation of the effect symbol 370 is stopped at the stop symbol selected based on the stop symbol command and the variation pattern command.

  FIGS. 103 to 105 show an example of a movable body effect performed by the frame movable body 156, the board movable body 371, and the operation handle 234 performed during the change of the effect symbol 370. FIG. 103 (a) shows a state in which a predetermined reach effect is being produced, and an animation image of a predetermined character is displayed on the liquid crystal display means 327. At this time, the frame movable body 156, the board movable body 371, and the operation handle 234 are held at the respective origin positions.

  During the reach effect, when the operation effect accompanied by the operation of the operation handle 234 by the player is started, as shown in FIGS. 103 (b), (c) and 104 (d), the liquid crystal display means 327 displays A countdown image such as “3 → 2 → 1” indicating the timing of the operation is displayed together with the operation guide image indicating that the operation handle 234 should be operated. At this time, for example, after the operation handle 234 repeats the reciprocating operation continuously, the operation handle 234 stops at the home position immediately before the countdown is completed.

  Then, when the player pushes the operation handle 234 in synchronization with the countdown end timing, the liquid crystal display means 327 blacks out, for example, as shown in FIG. The body 371 starts to move up in front of the liquid crystal display means 327.

  The board movable body 371 starts to lean forward just before reaching the upper limit position after ascending in a state facing directly in front, and when reaching the upper limit position, is approximately the same as the upper frame movable body 156 as shown in FIG. It has the same inclination. When the board movable body 371 reaches the upper limit position and the frame movable body 156 and the board movable body 371 have a specific relative positional relationship, the two movable bodies 156 and 371 are visually integrated in a front view to form a “butterfly”. Form. At this time, the game area 15a exists between the board movable body 371 and the frame movable body 156, but the upper constituent member 323c and the like of the central display frame unit 323 are transparently formed. Since the board movable body 371 on the rear side is visible from the front side, there is no visual separation between the board movable body 371 and the frame movable body 156. In addition, a non-inflow area 353 into which game balls cannot flow is disposed in an inward (downward) concave shape above the game area 15a, and the frame non-movable body 203 is disposed in front of the non-inflow area 353. Since the 371 and the frame movable body 156 are visually connected, the visual sense of unity between the panel movable body 371 and the frame movable body 156 is further strengthened.

  Further, when the board movable body 371 reaches the upper limit position and the “butterfly” form is completed, as shown in FIG. 105 (g), the frame movable body 156 and the board movable body 371 constituting the “butterfly” form The LED arranged on the frame non-movable body 203 emits light in a common light emitting mode. This common light emission mode may be any as long as it emphasizes the sense of unity of the "butterfly". For example, the LEDs 194a, 381a, and 205a arranged along the outer periphery of the "butterfly" are simultaneously lit (or flashed). Thus, the shape of the “butterfly” may be emphasized.

  After the board movable body 371 reaches the upper limit position and the “butterfly” form is completed, for example, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the liquid crystal display means 327, the operation handle 234 vibrates, and the rotating body 185 starts rotating. . As shown in FIG. 105 (h), the frame movable body 156 reciprocates back and forth between the origin position and the advance position, and in synchronism therewith, the panel movable body 371 reciprocates up and down within a range in which the inclination changes, for example. Operate. This makes it possible to further emphasize that the frame movable body 156 and the board movable body 371 are integrated to form a “butterfly”.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 105 (i), the LEDs 194a, 381a, and 205a stop emitting light, and both the frame movable body 156 and the board movable body 371 return to the origin positions.

  The error notification control means 444 controls error notification. For example, when an error command is received from the main control board 415a, an image display by the liquid crystal display means 327, a sound output by the speaker 17 or the like, a lamp (light decoration means 436) ) It is configured to execute error notification by light emission or the like for a predetermined period.

  In the present embodiment, for example, regarding the door opening error when the opening of the front frame 3 or the like is detected, the start timing of each error notification by voice, lamp, and liquid crystal is when an error occurs (when the door is opened). The end timings of the error notification are different from each other. That is, as shown in FIG. 106, the error notification by the liquid crystal ends when the error is resolved (when the door is closed), the error notification by the lamp ends when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the error ends, and the error notification by sound is performed. Is terminated when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of notification.

  As described above, the error notification by sound in the case of the door opening error ends after a predetermined time has elapsed from the occurrence of the error, but the door opening error notification continuation time by the sound is based on the display cycle of the base value by the performance display unit 435. The relationship is set as follows.

  In other words, the performance display means 435 displays a plurality of types of base values cyclically at predetermined time intervals. However, the number of types of base values displayed on the performance display means 435 is N, Assuming that the time is T and the duration of the door open error notification by voice is Tes, as shown in FIG. 106, Tes> T × (N−1). For example, if N = 4 and T = 5, Tes> 15.

  In this way, by setting the door opening error notification continuation time Te by voice to be larger than T × (N−1), for example, 16 seconds, the error notification by voice always spans all base value display periods. It is effective in the detection and deterrence of Goto behavior. If Tes is made longer and, for example, Tes> T × N, error notification by voice can be executed while all base values are displayed by T (seconds), and furthermore, Tes> T × ( If (N + 1) is set, the error notification by voice can always be executed during one display cycle of the base value by the performance display unit 435.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the rotation operation unit (first operation means) 82 which can be changed between the non-operation position and the operation upper limit position by an external operation, and the rotation operation unit 82 A return spring (biasing means) 83 for urging toward the non-operation position, and an operation lever (second operation means) 92 capable of performing a first operation from the outside are provided. While performing the firing operation of the game ball with the firing intensity according to the displacement amount from the non-operation position, the game ball fired with the displacement amount being equal to or less than the specific threshold value does not reach the game area 15a and exceeds the specific threshold value. The game ball fired in the state reaches the game area 15a, and when the first operation is performed on the operation lever 92, the shooting operation by the firing means 16 is not executed, and the rotation operation unit (first Operating means) 82 in non-operating position When the second operation is performed on the operation lever (second operation means) 92 at the time of operation, the rotation operation unit 82 is displaced to the operation upper limit position side with the second operation and the amount of displacement is specified. Since it is configured to be equal to or less than the threshold value, it is possible to easily and surely launch a foul ball by operating the operation lever 92.

  Further, while the second operation is being performed on the operation lever 92, the rotation operation unit 82 is held without returning to the non-operation position. In a state where the rotation operation unit 82 is in the non-operation position, the first operation on the operation lever 92 is prohibited, and the second operation is allowed.

  When the frame movable body 156 and the panel movable body 371 have a specific relative positional relationship, the frame movable body 156 and the panel movable body 371 are visually integrated to form a “butterfly” form (specific form). It is configured to At this time, the inclination of at least one of the frame movable body 156 and the panel movable body 371 (here, the panel movable body 371) changes just before the specific relative positional relationship is established, so that the frame movable body in the specific relative positional relationship changes. 156 and the movable plate 371 have substantially the same inclination. When the frame movable body 156 and the board movable body 371 have a specific relative positional relationship, the LED (first light emitting body) on the frame movable body 156 side and the LED (second light emitting body) on the board movable body 371 side Are emitted in a common light emission mode.

  Further, a non-inflow area 353 into which game balls cannot flow is arranged in an inward concave shape at a predetermined position in the game area 15a, and is disposed on the front frame 3 and is visually connected to the frame movable body 156 and the board movable body 371. At least a part of the frame non-movable body 203 that forms a part of the specific form by being integrated with the frame is configured to be located on the front side of the non-inflow area 353.

  In the game area 15a, a left downflow path 341 on the left side, a right downflow path 342 on the right side, and a right guide path 351 for guiding a game ball flowing into the upper side of the game area 15a to the right downflow path 342 are provided. , The right guide passage 351 is arranged along the edge of the non-inflow area 353. Further, the right guide passage 351 is formed transparent, and when the board movable body 371 is at the upper limit position (board-side specific position), a part of the board movable body 371 is located behind the right guide passage 351. ing. A return rubber 352 is disposed on the upstream end side of the right guide passage 351.

  Also, based on the detection by the out ball detection means 414, a normal out counter that counts the number of outs during the specific period, and based on the detection by the winning detection means including the start winning detection means 345a and 346a, each of the normal out counters during the specific period. A prize counter (specific number counter) for counting the number of prizes (specific number) to the prize means; a specific value calculating means for calculating a base value (specific value) based on each count value of the normal out counter and the prize counter; The specific period starts when at least the first and second special symbol display means 363 and 364 complete the symbol change and the start condition is satisfied, and the first and second special symbol display means 363 and 364 It is configured to end when the end condition is satisfied after the end of the symbol change, and during the specific period, the end condition Is longer than the maximum value (specific time) relating to the elapsed time until the game ball detected by the start winning detection means 345a, 346a is detected by the out ball detection means 414. The variation time of the last symbol change before the start condition is satisfied is set to the maximum value relating to the elapsed time until the game ball detected by the start winning detection means 345a, 346a is detected by the out ball detection means 414. (Specific time).

  Further, during the specific period, a predetermined period before the end of the symbol change in the last symbol change before the end condition is satisfied, the game ball detected by the start winning detection means, after that, the out ball detection means The time is set to be shorter than the specific time required for detection.

  In addition, during a non-specific period which is not a specific period, a predetermined period before the end of the symbol change in the last symbol change before the start condition is satisfied, a game ball detected by the starting winning detection means, The time is set to be shorter than a specific time required for detection by the out-ball detecting means.

  FIG. 107 illustrates a second embodiment of the present invention, in which the first embodiment is partially modified to provide an intermediate decorative body 451 on a frame movable body 156, and the intermediate decorative body 451 is mounted on the game board 15 side. In the example shown in FIG.

  The intermediate decorative body 451 is substantially the same as the frame non-movable body 203 in the first embodiment, for example, in the front shape, and is arranged protruding below the decorative unit 169 in the frame movable body 156, and 156 to operate integrally.

  Then, when the frame movable body 156 is within the movable range (frame-side specific position) between the origin position and the advance position, the intermediate decorative body 451 is located on the front side of the non-inflow area 353 in the upper component member 323c. It does not overlap with the right guide passage 351 when viewed.

  As described above, the intermediate decorative body 451 that operates integrally with the frame movable body 156 may be arranged on the front side of the non-inflow area 353.

  FIG. 108 illustrates a third embodiment of the present invention, in which the frame non-movable body 203 overlaps the front side of the right guide passage 351 in a front view by partially changing the first embodiment. An example is shown in which the obliquely upward viewpoint corresponding to the height of the eye is arranged so as not to overlap the front side of the right guide passage 351.

  With such a configuration, the frame non-movable body 203 can be arranged so as to project more toward the game area 15a (here, the lower side), and the visual union with the board movable body 371 is further enhanced. Is possible.

  Note that the second embodiment can be modified as in the third embodiment. That is, in front view, the intermediate decorative body 451 overlaps the front side of the right guide passage 351 in at least a part of the movable range between the origin position and the forward position, for example, but corresponds to the eye level of the player. It may be arranged so as not to overlap with the front side of the right guide passage 351 from an obliquely upward viewpoint.

  FIG. 109 illustrates the fourth embodiment of the present invention and shows an example in which the jackpot start interval and the jackpot end interval are set to be longer than a predetermined time in relation to the display cycle of the base value by the performance display unit 435. ing.

  During the jackpot start interval and the jackpot end interval, the symbol change is not performed and the big prize winning means 347 is not opened, so that the person in charge of the hall checks the base value by the performance display means 435 so as not to disturb the game. It can be said that it is the few periods in which it is possible.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the number of types of base values displayed on the performance display unit 435 is N, the display time for each base value is T, and the length of the big hit start / end interval is Tin, for example, Tin> T × (N-1). For example, if N = 4 and T = 5, then Tin> 15. As described above, by setting the length Tin of the jackpot start / end interval to be longer than 15 seconds, it is possible to execute the jackpot start / end interval so as to extend over all the base value display periods, and to execute the jackpot. It is possible to check all types of base values during the start / end interval.

  If Tin is made longer and, for example, Tin> T × N, all base values are displayed at least by T (seconds) during the jackpot start / end interval, and if Tin is made longer, for example, Tin> T If (N + 1), the display cycle of the base value by the performance display unit 435 is executed at least once during the big hit start / end interval, so that the base value can be more easily checked during the big hit start / end interval. It is possible to carry it.

  Note that in the case of the fourth embodiment, during the jackpot start / end interval, a base value confirmation possible notification that the base value can be confirmed may be executed. This base value confirming notice is displayed on the liquid crystal display means 327, for example, in addition to displaying words such as "base value confirmable", and the remaining time until the end of the jackpot start / end interval, such as "remaining XX seconds", for example, as a countdown display. You may make it. Further, only one of the jackpot start interval and the jackpot end interval may be set to the above-described length.

  FIG. 110 and FIG. 111 illustrate the fifth embodiment of the present invention, and show an example in which a guide gutter 452 for guiding a game ball won to the second special symbol starting means 346 to the discharge port 412 side is arranged. In the present embodiment, a shape for guiding game balls in the ball collecting case 411 will also be described.

  As shown in FIGS. 110 and 111, the ball collecting case 411 is mounted and fixed on the back side of the base plate 321 in a state where the ball collecting case 411 is placed on the lower rear side of the back mounting base 329 from behind. An opening 453 that is long in the left-right direction is provided along the back surface of the base plate 321 on the front side of the bottom of the back mounting base 329.

  The bottom surface of the ball-collecting case 411 is formed of a plurality of inclined surfaces having a lower height at the outlet 412 arranged at, for example, the front side substantially at the center in the left-right direction. A part is disposed below and corresponding to the opening 453 of the ball collecting case 411.

  On the bottom surface of the ball collecting case 411, a left first inclined surface 461 is arranged on the left side of the outlet 412, for example, and a left second inclined surface 462 is further arranged on the upstream side (left side). A right first inclined surface 463 is disposed on the right side, and a second right inclined surface 464 is further disposed on the upstream side (right side). For example, a central inclined surface 465 is disposed on the rear side of the outlet 412.

  The inclined surfaces 461 to 465 all have forward inclined angles, and the forward inclined angles are, for example, all substantially the same (for example, 3 degrees). On the other hand, the inclined surfaces 461 to 464 disposed on the left and right of the outlet 412 have a horizontal inclination angle so that the side of the outlet 412 becomes lower, and the horizontal inclined angles of the inclined surfaces 461 to 464 are reduced. Are not identical but are partially different. That is, for example, the inclined surfaces 461 and 462 disposed on the left side of the outlet 412 have substantially the same inclination angle in the left-right direction (for example, 5 degrees), but the inclined surface disposed on the right side of the outlet 412. Regarding 463 and 464, the upstream right second inclined surface 464 has a larger left-right inclination angle than the downstream right first inclined surface 463 (for example, the right first inclined surface 463 has 4 degrees, 2 inclined surface 464 is 5 degrees). Further, the left inclined surface 461 and the right inclined surface 463 with the discharge port 412 interposed therebetween have different inclination angles in the left-right direction (for example, the left first inclined surface 461 is 5 degrees and the right first inclined surface 463 is inclined). 4 degrees).

  The relationship between the left and right inclined surfaces 461 and 463 of the discharge port 412 in the left and right directions is arbitrary. For example, even if the inclined angle of the right inclined surface 463 is larger than the inclined angle of the left inclined surface 461. Good. Further, the inclination angle of the side (the right side in the present embodiment) where the winning detection switch (or the winning means) is large may be larger than the inclination angle of the side where the winning detection switch (or the winning means) is small (the left side in the present embodiment). This makes it possible to increase the efficiency of discharging the game balls. In addition, steps are formed at the boundary between the inclined surfaces 461 and 462 and at the boundary between the inclined surfaces 463 and 464, but the steps may not be provided.

  A guide gutter 452 is arranged on the back side of the base plate 321 so as to correspond to a lower side of the winning detection means 346a provided in the second special symbol starting means 346. The guide gutter 452 includes an inflow port 452a on the upstream end side and an outflow port 452b on the downstream end side. The detection means 348a and the prize detection means 347a disposed below the prize detection means 346a and closer to the discharge port 412 than the prize detection means 346a are arranged in a substantially vertical direction so as to pass therethrough. The entrance 452a is connected to the downstream side of the winning detection means 346a, and the outlet 452b opens downward, for example, near the upper right side of the second inclined surface 464 on the bottom surface of the ball collecting case 411.

  The guide gutter 452 has the outlet 452b disposed closer to the outlet 412 than the inlet 452a, and guides the game ball toward the outlet 412 between the inlet 452a and the outlet 452b. An inclined guide portion 452c is provided, and the inclined angle of the inclined guide portion is larger than the inclined angle of the right second inclined surface 464 and the like. In addition, the guide gutter 452 is disposed so as to sufficiently pass the position near the outlet 412 with respect to the prize detecting means 348a below the prize detecting means 346a, avoiding the vicinity thereof. The game ball that has won the second special symbol starting means 346 and passed through the winning detection means 346a passes through the guide gutter 452, so that, for example, it is possible to avoid the collision with other winning means and the like, and to discharge the ball earlier. 412 can be reached. In addition, since the game balls discharged from the outlet 452b land on the inclined surface 464, the game balls can be immediately guided to the discharge port 412 side.

  Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described in detail, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, in the embodiment, an example is shown in which the out ball detection means 414 is arranged downstream of each of the winning detection means and the out mouth 358. However, the out ball detection means is arranged upstream of each of the winning detection means and the out mouth 358. For example, it may be arranged at the entrance of the game area 15a and configured to detect a game ball that has passed through the return prevention valve 337. In this case, assuming that the elapsed time from passing through the out ball detecting means to passing through the prize detecting means or the out mouth is "specific elapsed time", the last symbol before the end of the addition period or before the start of the addition period. 84 to FIG. 84 in which the predetermined period before the end of the fluctuation is set to a time shorter than the minimum value of the specific elapsed time for each of the winning detection means (excluding the large winning means 347) and the out port 358 (almost the same time). The example of FIG. 87 can be applied as it is. In this case, however, the start point of the white arrow and the black arrow shown in FIGS. 84 to 87 is the passage timing of the out ball detection means, and the end point is the passage timing of the prize detection means.

  The predetermined value of the specific elapsed time may be an average value, a maximum value, or the like instead of the minimum value. The "minimum value (predetermined value) of the specific elapsed time" may be the minimum value (predetermined value) of the specific elapsed time for all winning means or the like, or may be the specific winning means or the like, for example, the starting winning means. The minimum value (predetermined value) of the specific elapsed time may be used.

  In the embodiment, the predetermined period before the end of the addition period or before the end of the change in the last symbol change before the start of the addition period is the symbol fixed period + α, but the predetermined period may be only the symbol fixed period. For example, in the case of FIG. 84 and FIG. 85, the fluctuation time of the symbol confirmation is set to a time equal to or shorter than the minimum value of the specific elapsed time (here, the minimum value of the specific elapsed time relating to the out port 358, Te1). For example, the fluctuation time after the jackpot symbol display (shake fluctuation) is set to a time equal to or longer than the maximum value of the specific elapsed time (here, Tb2 which is the maximum value of the specific elapsed time for the second special symbol starting means 346). May be set. In the case of FIG. 86, the variation time of the symbol determination is set to a time equal to or shorter than the minimum value of the specific elapsed time (here, Te1 which is the minimum value of the specific elapsed time for the out port 358). The fluctuating time after the effect result display period is set to be equal to or longer than the maximum value of the specific elapsed time (here, Tb2 which is the maximum value of the specific elapsed time for the second special symbol starting means 346). Is also good. In the case of FIG. 87, the change time of the symbol determination is set to a time equal to or shorter than the minimum value of the specific elapsed time (here, the minimum value of the specific elapsed time for the out port 358, Te1). The fluctuating time after the screen may be set to be equal to or longer than the maximum value of the specific elapsed time (here, Tb2 which is the maximum value of the specific elapsed time for the second special symbol starting means 346).

  In the embodiment, when the frame movable body 156 and the panel movable body 371 approach each other and come into a specific relative positional relationship, the inclination of the panel movable body 371 changes to be substantially the same as the inclination of the frame movable body 156. However, the inclination of the frame movable body 156 may be changed, or the inclination of both the frame movable body 156 and the panel movable body 371 may be changed. For example, when the board movable body 371 rises and approaches the frame movable body 156, the inclination of the frame movable body 156 may be reduced to face the front together with the panel movable body 371.

  In the embodiment, while the frame movable body 156 is stopped at the origin position and the board movable body 371 moves to the upper limit position to form a “butterfly” form, the board movable body 371 is moved to the origin position. A specific form may be formed by moving the frame movable body 156 to a predetermined position while stopped. Further, the frame movable body 156 and the board movable body 371 may be configured to move to a position other than the origin position to form a specific form.

  When the frame movable body 156 and the board movable body 371 are separated from each other and do not form a specific form, for example, the board movable body 371 is deformed to form a form different from “butterfly” (specific form). May be configured. The same applies to the frame movable body 156.

  In the embodiment, one frame movable body 156 and one panel movable body 371 are configured to form one specific form (butterfly). However, at least the frame movable body and the panel movable body forming the specific form are formed. One may be provided in plurality. For example, a pair of frame movable bodies are arranged on both left and right sides of the viewing window 24, and when the panel movable body moves to the center of the liquid crystal display means 327, a specific form is formed by the panel movable body and the pair of left and right frame movable bodies. You may make it.

  The order of returning to the standby position (origin position) after the movable body effect regarding the movable body effect using the panel movable body and the frame movable body is to first return the frame movable body to the standby position, and then move the panel movable body to the standby position. May be restored. Since the frame movable body is configured so that the player can directly touch it with the hand, there is a risk that the frame movable body will malfunction, such as stopping the moving frame movable body by hand or pinching an object in the movable part Is higher than the movable panel. Therefore, it is desirable that the end of the movable body effect, that is, the movement to the standby position be performed as quickly as possible, and the frame movable body may be moved to the standby position before the movable board.

  Alternatively, the movable platen may be moved to the standby position earlier than the movable frame member. Since the movable panel is located in front of the liquid crystal, the operation of the movable panel may obscure the liquid crystal display. That is, the contents of the liquid crystal display will be limited until the movable panel is completed moving to the standby position. In order to eliminate the limitation as quickly as possible, first move the movable panel to the standby position. After the movement, the frame movable body may be moved to the standby position.

  Further, the panel movable body and the frame movable body may be moved to the standby position substantially simultaneously or at the same time / synchronously. In this case, since the simultaneous driving is performed, the current value used by the gaming machine temporarily increases, but if a power supply that can cope with this is prepared, the gaming machine is moved to the standby position by the simultaneous driving. You may. Further, in order to suppress the current value due to the simultaneous driving, for example, the LED mounted on the frame movable body or the panel movable body when moving to the standby position and / or other LEDs are configured to be turned off. Is also good.

  The liquid crystal production may be started before the movable panel and the movable frame move from the production position to the standby position (origin position). In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 105 (h), the symbol won this time may be displayed. Further, a continuation of the hit effect that was performed before the movable body effect may be executed.

  When a vibration means for performing a vibration effect is provided in an operation means or the like which can be operated by a player, the vibration effect is executed when the frame movable body and the board movable body form an integrated form (design). You may do so. After that, the vibration effect may be executed until the frame movable body or the panel movable body returns to the standby position. However, when the game part on the frame side such as the operation means is provided with the vibration means, since the vibration is transmitted to the entire frame by the vibration effect, the vibration may affect the operation of the frame movable body. Therefore, the vibration effect may not be executed at least during the operation of the frame movable body. For example, when the frame movable body and the board movable body form an integrated form (design), the frame movable body is stopped at the production position, and a vibration effect is performed during the stop, and the stage is moved from the production position to the standby position. When moving, the vibration effect may be terminated. Further, the vibration effect may be executed again after moving to the standby position. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce a risk that the operation of the frame movable body is affected by the vibration effect.

  An operation pattern for operating the frame movable body and the panel movable body individually may be provided. Then, a specific operation pattern for forming an integrated form (design) by operating the frame movable body and the panel movable body, a frame operation pattern for operating only the frame movable body, and a panel operation pattern for operating only the panel movable body May be used according to the effect contents. For example, in a hit effect in which a hit change at the end of reach of hit change is notified, a specific operation pattern is executed, and in the case of a hit, a frame movable body and a board movable body form an integrated form (design). Thus, the effect of the movable body effect may be enhanced.

  In addition, in the case of a hit variation or an out-of-change, a movable body notice for operating the movable body may be executed as a notice for notifying the great hit expectation of the variation. In this case, a frame operation pattern or a board operation is performed. A pattern may be executed so that the specific operation pattern is not used in the notice of the movable body. As a result, only the board motion pattern and / or the frame motion pattern is executed before the hit change of the frequently-occurring variation or hit variation, so that the elation and the impact when the specific motion pattern is executed are relatively reduced. Can be increased.

  A state in which a frame movable body and a board movable body are operated to form an integrated form (design) in a big hit state, a time saving state, a latent state, a probable change state, etc., which are advantageous to a player as compared with a normal game state. May be maintained. As a result, while the player stays in an advantageous gaming state, the movable body of the board frame forms an integral form, so that not only the player playing the game but also the It is also possible to attract a traveling player or the like to an integrated movable body effect using the entire gaming machine. In addition, in the case of such a configuration, it is desirable that the ramp effect according to the variable effect performed during the game also has a lamp pattern that is aware that the board / frame movable body is integrated, for example, In the normal game state in which the board / frame movable body is non-integrated, each executes an independent ramp pattern, whereas in the game state in which the board / frame movable body is integrated, It is preferable that the light emitting effect is executed by a lamp pattern that can be seen integrally.

  Regarding the initialization of the movable body at the time of power-on, if there are a specific operation pattern, a frame operation pattern, and a board operation pattern as the operation patterns of the movable body used during the change, initialize all the operation patterns. You may. In this case, after executing the board operation pattern and / or the frame operation pattern, the specific operation pattern may be executed. At this time, if the board operation pattern or the frame operation pattern cannot execute the operation properly, the specific operation pattern may not be executed. As for the initialization, only a specific operation pattern may be performed, or only a board operation pattern and a frame operation pattern may be performed. In this case, regardless of which one is selected, it is possible to execute the operation check of each movable body of the board frame, so that the time required for initialization can be reduced as compared to executing all the operation patterns. Become.

  You may make it arrange | position so that the standby position of a board movable body may be the back side of a frame movable body in front view. With such a configuration, the board movable body is arranged so as to be hidden by the frame movable body when viewed from the front, and the board movable body stands by at a position where the player becomes a blind spot. Thereby, at the time of the movable body effect, the board movable body can be configured to suddenly appear in the area visible to the player from the rear side of the frame movable body, which can surprise the player, By forming the board movable body and the frame movable body that have appeared to form an integrated form (design), it is possible to execute a more powerful movable body effect. Further, when the standby position of the panel movable body is disposed so as to be behind the frame movable body when viewed from the front, even if all the panel movable bodies are disposed behind the frame movable body when viewed from the front, Alternatively, the movable platen may be arranged so that a part of the movable platen is behind the frame movable member when viewed from the front. Also, the standby position of the board movable body may be a position that can be a blind spot of the player in front view, for example, in the same direction as the upper part where the frame movable body is located, so as to be located behind the game board or game component It may be arranged. In addition, when the frame movable bodies are arranged not on the upper side but on the left and right sides and on the lower side, the directions may be the same.

  The frame movable body and the design of the game board surface (game area) may form an integrated design. The frame movable body, the design of the game board surface, and the board movable body may form an integrated form (design). Thereby, at the time of operation of the frame movable body, a more integrated design can be formed over the entire board frame. In addition, the design of the game board surface may be a design drawn on the game board, a seal-shaped design, or a design (shape, drawing, seal, etc.) applied to a game component mounted on the game board. Good.

  The moving direction of the frame movable body and the board movable body may be set to a common direction, so that an integrated movable body movement effect may be executed at the time of the movable body effect. For example, at the time of the movable body effect, the board movable body starts moving from the lower side to the upper side, and when completing the upward movement, the frame movable body operates toward the upper side of the gaming machine. This makes it possible to execute a movable body effect by a more integrated operation using the board / frame movable body. Also, at the end of the movable body effect, first, the frame movable body starts to move downward, and when the movement to the standby position is completed, the panel movable body is moved from the upper side to the lower side and returned to the standby position. You may do so. In this manner, a more integrated board frame movable body effect may be executed from the start to the end of the movable body effect.

  By operating the panel movable body and the frame movable body, an integral form (design) is formed, but the pattern forming the integral form may be one type or a plurality of types. . That is, the first movable design is formed by operating the movable panel and the movable frame to form the first integrated design, and then the second movable movable body and / or the second movable frame are further operated to thereby form a second integrated design different from the first integrated design. You may comprise so that an integral design may be formed. Further, the second integrated design may be different from the first integrated design. For example, the second integrated design may form a character or a design completely different from the first integrated design, or the first integrated design may be deformed. May form a second integrated design that appears to be performing any particular operation. Further, the second integrated design is not limited to the one formed after forming the first integrated design. When the first specific operation pattern is executed, the first integrated design is formed, and the second specific operation pattern is executed. In this case, a second integrated design may be formed. Further, a configuration may be such that the reliability of the winning is different between the case where the first integrated design is formed and the case where the second integrated design is formed.

  It is good also as composition which equips two or more frame movable bodies and board movable bodies, and forms an integrated design by combining each. A first integrated design is formed by operating the first frame movable body and the first panel movable body, and a second integrated design is formed by operating the second frame movable body and the second panel movable body. By operating the first frame movable body and the second panel movable body, a third integrated design is formed, and by operating the second frame movable body and the first panel movable body, the fourth integrated design is operated. May be formed. Further, the first frame movable body, the second frame movable body, the first panel movable body, and the second panel movable body may be operated to form a fifth integrated design.

  By moving the movable panel to a predetermined position without operating the movable frame, an integrated design may be formed. Alternatively, the frame movable body may be moved to a predetermined position without operating the panel movable body to form an integrated design. When forming an integral design with the frame movable body, the board movable body, and the game board surface design, the first movable design with the game board surface design is formed by operating the frame movable body, and the board movable body is formed. By operating, a second integrated design with the design of the game board may be formed. Alternatively, the frame movable body and the board movable body may be operated to form a third integrated design with the design of the game board surface. In this case, the reliability of the big hit may be different between the case where the first integrated design is formed, the case where the second integrated design is formed, and the case where the third integrated design is formed. .

  When a frame movable body and a plurality of panel movable bodies are provided, the first panel movable body and the second panel movable body are at least operated by the operation of the first panel movable body or the operations of the first panel movable body and the second panel movable body. May form a first integrated design, and at least the operation of the first panel movable body may form the second integrated design with the first panel movable body and the frame movable body. Further, a third integrated design may be formed by the second panel movable body and the frame movable body by at least the operation of the second panel movable body. As described above, the first integrated design formed by operating the plurality of board movable bodies and the at least one of the plurality of board movable bodies are operated to be formed by the board movable body and the frame movable body. With the configuration having the second integrated design, it is possible to make the movable body effect more impactful. Also, in this case, the integrated design formed only by the movable panel and the integrated design formed by the movable panel and the frame movable body have different reliability of a big hit when they appear. Is also good. In addition, it is desirable that the integrated design formed by the movable panel and the movable frame, which can give more impact to the player, has a higher hitting reliability when an integrated design is formed. .

  As for the launch guide passage 336 on the front side of the game board 15, for example, a part of the upstream end side (the launching means side) is hidden by the front door 4 (that is, it is outside the viewing window 24), and the game balls inside from the front side. It is good also as a concealed passage part which cannot visually recognize. At this time, when a foul ball is intentionally generated by operating the operation lever 92 from the second position to the first position (second operation), the shooting intensity is set so that the launched game ball returns in the concealed passage. May be. Alternatively, the shooting intensity may be set such that the launched game ball returns through the concealed passage.

  For example, the output period of the security signal related to the setting confirmation may be either during the setting confirmation processing or after the setting confirmation processing, or may be both of them. Also, the output time (predetermined time) of the security signal relating to the setting confirmation can be arbitrarily set from a short time of about 50 ms to a long time of 30000 ms or more. Different security signals may be output during the setting confirmation process and after the setting confirmation process. In the embodiment, the initial value is set in the fraudulent information timer at the start of the setting confirmation process. However, a flag indicating the execution of the setting confirmation process may be set.

  In the embodiment, in the dynamic lighting control of the performance information display unit 433 during setting change or setting confirmation, common data is designated only during lighting (4 ms), and common data is not designated during lighting (12 ms). Although the configuration is made so as to be cleared, the common data may be switched every 4 ms as in the case where the base value is displayed on the performance information display means 433 during the game. In this case, it is desirable to specify lighting data during lighting (4 ms), and to switch to lighting data during lighting (12 ms) to control lighting.

  In the embodiment, a program for performing dynamic lighting is modularized, and a common sub-module is called during setting change and setting confirmation. However, the present invention is not limited to this. May be configured to call a lighting module used when displaying a base value on the display.

  In the embodiment, a part of the performance display unit 435 is configured to be used as the setting display unit 434. However, the entire performance display unit 435 may be used as the setting display unit 434. The display means 435 may be provided separately.

  In the embodiment, an example has been described in which the operation confirmation display is continuously executed even when an abnormality occurs in the out-of-area RAM during the operation confirmation display of the performance display unit 435 and the out-of-area RAM is cleared. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the operation confirmation display of the performance display unit 435 is interrupted when the out-of-area RAM is cleared due to an abnormality in the out-of-area RAM during the operation confirmation display.

  As a first configuration in this case, for example, it is conceivable that the embodiment is partially modified and the operation check timer is stored not in the in-area RAM but in the out-of-area RAM like the blinking cycle timer. As a result, when an abnormality occurs in the out-of-area RAM (S71 in FIG. 80: Yes), the out-of-area RAM is initialized (cleared) (S72), and the operation check timer becomes 0. If the confirmation display is being performed, the operation confirmation display is interrupted at that point and is not resumed thereafter.

  The first configuration may be further modified so that, for example, when an abnormality occurs in the out-of-area RAM and the out-of-area RAM is initialized (cleared), an initial value is set in the operation confirmation timer. . Thereby, the operation confirmation display can be executed again from the beginning. At this time, the initial value may be set in the operation confirmation timer only when the operation confirmation display is performed at the timing when the out-of-area RAM is initialized. Thus, it is possible to prevent the operation confirmation display from being performed again when an abnormality occurs in the out-of-area RAM after the operation confirmation display is completed. Conversely, if the operation check timer is set to the initial value regardless of the timing at which the RAM outside the area is initialized, if an abnormality occurs in the RAM outside the area after the end of the operation check display, the operation check is performed again. Display is performed. When an abnormality occurs in the out-of-area RAM and the out-of-area RAM is initialized (cleared), not only is the initial value set in the operation confirmation timer, but also a blinking cycle timer, a lighting / light-out switching counter, and a display content. A configuration may also be adopted in which an initial value is set for a pointer or the like. In the case of the display update processing of the embodiment (FIG. 93), when the value of the operation check timer is 1200 corresponding to 4800 ms in S121, S122 for setting an initial value to the blinking cycle timer or the like is executed. If a value obtained by adding 1 to the timer value corresponding to 4800 ms, specifically 1201, is set as the initial value in the timer, the initial value can also be set in the blinking period timer or the like. If a value other than, for example, 1200, which is a timer value corresponding to 4800 ms, is set, S122 is not executed, so that the initial value is not set in the blink cycle timer or the like.

  Further, as a second configuration in which the operation confirmation display is interrupted when the out-of-area RAM is cleared, for example, the embodiment is partially changed. It is conceivable to clear the operation confirmation timer stored in the in-area RAM. As a result, if the out-of-area RAM is cleared during the operation check display due to an abnormality in the out-of-area RAM, the operation check timer is also cleared to 0, so that the operation check display is interrupted at that point and restarted thereafter. There is no.

  Further, as a third configuration for interrupting the operation confirmation display when the out-of-area RAM is cleared, for example, when the out-of-area RAM is cleared due to an abnormality in the out-of-area RAM, It is conceivable to set an initial value to the operation check timer stored in the in-area RAM. Thus, if the out-of-area RAM is cleared during the operation check display due to the abnormality of the out-of-area RAM, the operation check display can be executed again from the beginning. At this time, the initial value may be set in the operation confirmation timer only when the operation confirmation display is performed at the timing when the out-of-area RAM is initialized. Thus, it is possible to prevent the operation confirmation display from being performed again when an abnormality occurs in the out-of-area RAM after the operation confirmation display is completed. Conversely, if the operation check timer is set to the initial value regardless of the timing at which the RAM outside the area is initialized, if an abnormality occurs in the RAM outside the area after the end of the operation check display, the operation check is performed again. Display is performed. When an abnormality occurs in the out-of-area RAM and the out-of-area RAM is initialized (cleared), not only is the initial value set in the operation confirmation timer, but also a blinking cycle timer, a lighting / light-out switching counter, and a display content. A configuration may also be adopted in which an initial value is set for a pointer or the like. In the case of the display update processing of the embodiment (FIG. 93), when the value of the operation check timer is 1200 corresponding to 4800 ms in S121, S122 for setting an initial value to the blinking cycle timer or the like is executed. If a value obtained by adding 1 to the timer value corresponding to 4800 ms, specifically 1201, is set as the initial value in the timer, the initial value can also be set in the blinking period timer or the like. If a value other than, for example, 1200, which is a timer value corresponding to 4800 ms, is set, S122 is not executed, so that the initial value is not set in the blink cycle timer or the like.

  The mode of the operation confirmation display of the performance display means 435 is not limited to the full blinking in which all the seven-segment display units blink simultaneously, but may be the sequential blinking in which a plurality of seven-segment display units blink in order.

  Among the setting change function units (RAM clear switch 431, setting change operation means 432, setting display means 434, etc.) related to the setting change function, the RAM clear switch 431 and the setting change operation means 432 are mainly operated so that they can be operated from outside. It is necessary to expose the board to the outside (rear side) of the board case 415, but it is desirable that the setting display means 434 be housed in the main board case 415, as long as the display content can be visually recognized from the outside. This makes it difficult to access at least the setting display unit 434. For example, the setting display unit 434 displays a setting value that is disadvantageous to the player while incorrectly changing the setting value to one that is advantageous to the player. Such a goto can be prevented.

  Since the setting change function changes the jackpot probability, it is important to be able to easily find traces of the goto action. Therefore, when the electronic components connected to each setting change function unit (for example, the main control CPU → the electronic component 1 → the electronic component 2 → the setting change function unit are connected in this order, the electronic components 1 and 2 are connected). Regarding at least one of them, it is desirable to arrange them at a position that does not overlap with the management number notation part, the opening history notation part, etc. of the main board case 415. Thereby, when the main board case 415 is visually recognized from the rear of the gaming machine main body 1 (when the main control board 415a is visually recognized through the back portion of the main board case 415), the electronic components connected to each setting change function unit are removed. It can be easily confirmed. In addition to the control number notation portion and the opening history notation portion, for example, when a sticker stating the number of settable setting values (settings 1 to 6 and the like) and the jackpot probability for each setting is attached to the main board case 415. It is desirable to have a similar configuration.

  In addition, not only electronic components connected to each setting change function unit, but also electronic components connected to the performance display unit 435 that displays a base value (not limited to those physically connected, for example, main control In the case where the components are connected in the order of CPU → electronic component 1 → electronic component 2 → performance display means 435, it is desirable that the same configuration be used for both the electronic component 1 and the electronic component 2). Thus, even if a goto action such as rewriting or resetting the base value in the cumulative game is performed due to some kind of fraud on the electronic component, it is easy to find the trace.

  The opening / closing cover 418 may be arranged at the rear side of each setting change function unit provided on the main board case 415. As a result, each setting change function unit cannot be accessed unless the opening / closing cover 418 is opened, which is advantageous in terms of suppression of gobbling. Also, while adopting a configuration in which the opening / closing cover 418 is located on the rear side of the main board case 415, an opening is provided in a part of the opening / closing cover 418 so that each setting change function unit and the opening / closing cover 418 do not overlap each other. Notches or the like may be provided. As a result, since a part of the main board case 415 is in a front-back relationship with the opening / closing cover 418, the main board case 415 cannot be easily removed unless the opening / closing cover 418 is opened, and the sticking action is suppressed. In addition, when the person in charge of the hall accesses each setting change function unit in order to change the setting, the opening / closing cover 418 does not need to be opened, and the setting can be changed easily. If consideration is given only to the ease of access when the person in charge of the hall changes the setting, the opening / closing cover 418 may not be located behind the main board case 415.

  In addition, among the setting change function units, some of the function units may be arranged at positions not overlapping the opening / closing cover 418, and other function units may be arranged at positions overlapping the opening / closing cover 418. . For example, among the setting change function units, the setting display unit 434 (performance information display unit 433) is disposed at a position overlapping the opening / closing cover 418, and the other setting change operation unit 432, the RAM clear switch 431, and the like are not. You may arrange | position at the position which does not overlap with the opening / closing cover 418 front and back. This makes it difficult to access the setting display unit 434, so that it is possible to suppress a gossip action of changing the display of the setting information, and to access the setting change operation unit 432, the RAM clear switch 431, and the like without opening the open / close cover 418. Therefore, the setting can be easily changed.

  Further, in the case of the setting change operation unit 432 in which the setting key is inserted into the keyhole to perform the ON / OFF operation as in the embodiment, the keyhole may be arranged at a position overlapping the opening / closing cover 418 in the front-back direction. In this case, the configuration may be such that the cover 418 cannot be closed when the setting key is inserted into the keyhole. For example, it is conceivable that the gap between the keyhole portion with the opening / closing cover 418 closed and the opening / closing cover 418 on the rear side is made smaller than the projecting height of the setting key when inserted into the keyhole portion. . As a result, it is possible to prevent the user from forgetting to remove the setting key after changing the setting or confirming the setting. Conversely, the configuration may be such that the open / close cover 418 can be closed even when the setting key is inserted. This prevents the opening / closing cover 418 or the setting key from being damaged by contact with the setting key even if the setting key is left inserted and the opening / closing cover 418 is closed after the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed. it can.

  Further, the keyhole portion of the setting change operation means 432 may be arranged at a position where it does not overlap with the opening / closing cover 418 so that the opening / closing cover 418 can be closed even when the setting key is inserted. In this case, with the cover 418 closed, the head of the setting key inserted into the keyhole may be configured to protrude more rearward than the cover 418. Thus, after the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed, when the opening / closing cover 418 is closed with the setting key being kept inserted, the setting key protrudes from the opening / closing cover 418, so that it is easy to notice that the setting key is forgotten. There is an advantage that.

  Among the setting change function units, any combination of a unit arranged at a position overlapping the opening / closing cover 418 in the front and rear and a unit arranged at a position not overlapping the opening / closing cover 418 in the front and rear is arbitrary. When the setting display unit 434 (performance information display unit 433) is arranged at a position overlapping the opening / closing cover 418 in the front-back direction, at least a portion of the opening / closing cover 418 corresponding to the rear side of the setting display unit 434 is opened and closed. It is desirable to have light transmittance so that the set value can be visually recognized even when the 418 is closed. Further, the heat radiation holes provided in the opening / closing cover 418 may be arranged at positions overlapping the setting display means 434 in the front-back direction. Thereby, the visibility at the time of confirming the set value is improved. Further, among the setting change function units, any combination of a unit arranged at a position overlapping the heat radiation hole of the opening and closing cover 418 in front and rear and a unit arranged at a position not overlapping the heat radiation hole of the opening and closing cover 418 in the front and rear is arbitrary (all They may be overlapping positions, or may not be all overlapping positions).

  To transmit a command (hereinafter, referred to as a setting information command) relating to a setting change function such as a setting change start command (BA76H), a setting change end command (BA77H), and a setting check start command (BA60H) from the main control board 415a to the sub board. (Hereinafter, referred to as a specific harness) is desirably wired at a position overlapping the front and rear cover 418. When the opening / closing cover 418 has a plurality of heat radiating holes, it is desirable to wire the specific harness to a position avoiding the heat radiating holes. The “harness” here is constituted by a plurality of signal lines that connect the connectors at both ends. However, as described above, the “harness” may be wired at a position overlapping the opening / closing cover 418 in the front-rear direction, or may be a heat radiation hole of the opening / closing cover 418. The wiring may be performed in such a manner that at least a signal line to which a setting information command is transmitted among a plurality of signal lines may be included. This makes it difficult to access the specific harness from the rear side of the gaming machine. For example, by inserting / removing the specific harness and / or the signal line of the specific harness and installing an illegal electronic component, information different from the original setting information command is illegally obtained. Goto action such as transmitting to the sub board can be suppressed.

  In addition, the specific harness may be wired at a position that does not overlap the opening / closing cover 418 in the front-rear direction, or may be wired at a position overlapping the heat radiation hole of the opening / closing cover 418. This facilitates access to the specific harness from the rear of the gaming machine, increases the visibility of the specific harness from the rear of the gaming machine, and facilitates visual confirmation. In addition, with respect to the specific harness, access may be made difficult by covering the periphery of the plurality of signal lines with a specific member such as vinyl. Also in this case, by adopting the above-described arrangement, it is possible to more securely prevent impropriety.

  In the embodiment, the setting information displayed on the setting display unit 434 can be distinguished as to whether the setting information is before or after the determination by adding “. (Dot)” to the setting information. For example, among the 7-segment display units 433a to 433d constituting the performance information display unit 433, the setting information before the setting information is determined due to the difference in the display mode of the 7-segment display units 433b to 433d not used as the setting display unit 434. Alternatively, it may be notified whether or not it has been determined.

  In the embodiment, the configuration change or the confirmation of the setting is configured to be notified by the illumination means 436, the speaker 17, the liquid crystal display means 327, or the like controlled by the sub-board side. Alternatively, the information may be notified by a panel lamp or setting display means 434 controlled by. Here, the illumination means 436 controlled on the sub-substrate side is, for example, a movable body mounted on the frame side of the gaming machine, operating means, other LEDs provided on the decoration portion, or a gaming board side of the gaming machine. LED mounted on various game parts such as a movable body, a starting port, an attacker, a center case, and the like, which are mounted on the game device. On the other hand, the board lamp controlled by the main control board 415a is a game information display means 326 (FIG. 53) provided on the game board 15 so as to be visible from the front of the game machine.

  The game information display means 326 receives a signal directly from the main control board 415a without passing through the sub-control board for various items related to the symbol lottery determined on the main control board 415a side, and displays a plurality of types of light emission display. Notification is made by means. In the embodiment, as a plurality of types of light emitting display means constituted by the game information display means 326, a normal symbol display means 361, first and second special symbol display means 363 and 364, first and second special reserved number display. Means 365 and 366, ordinary reserved number display means 362, fluctuation shortening notification means 367, right-handed notification means 368, and round number notification means 369 have been illustrated, but are not limited thereto.

  Then, during the setting change and / or the setting confirmation, the LED 360 constituting the game information display means 326 is caused to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode so as to notify that the setting is being changed and / or the setting is being confirmed. You may comprise. In this case, the light emission mode of the game information display means 326 may be such that all of the LEDs 360 are lit or flashed, or some of the plurality of types of light emission display means described above may be lit or flashed. . At this time, it is also possible to make it possible to identify whether the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed by making the light emission mode different between the setting being changed and the setting being confirmed, or conversely, when the setting is being changed and the setting is being confirmed. By making the light emission mode the same, it may not be possible to identify whether the setting is being changed or the setting is being checked.

  In addition, in the case of the embodiment, a state in which a game cannot be performed during a setting change or a setting confirmation (specifically, a firing operation is impossible, a winning in a starting winning opening is invalid, This is a state in which processing is not performed, that is, a state in which timer interrupt processing for performing these processings has not been started yet as a main control program). Cannot be displayed. Therefore, during the setting change and / or during the setting confirmation, the person in charge of the hall mistakenly recognizes that the game information display means 326 emits light in any light emission mode in order to notify the fact that the information is a symbol change. Although it is unlikely that the game information display means 326 emits light as described below during setting change and / or setting confirmation, more effective notification is possible.

  That is, when the light emitting display means of the game information display means 326 is turned on / off / blinks, etc. to notify that the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed, the light emitting mode is visually displayed by many LEDs 360. Confirmation can be made easier. Also, when the notification is made only by the specific single light emitting display means, the notification becomes impossible when the light emitting portion of the light emitting display means is broken, but when the notification is made by using all the light emitting display means. Don't worry about that.

  In addition, when one of the plurality of types of light emission display means of the game information display means 326 is turned on / off / blinks, etc., to notify that the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed. The program capacity for light emission control can be reduced as compared with the case where the notification is made using all the light emission display means. In this case, when the light-emitting display means is constituted by a single light-emitting section (LED 360), the visibility is reduced as compared with the case of constituted by a plurality of light-emitting sections. A program capacity for transmitting a control signal indicating / flashing can be further reduced.

  In addition, when notifying that the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed by combining at least two or more of the plurality of types of light emitting display means of the game information display means 326 to turn on / off / blink, etc. This makes it easier to recognize that the current situation is not a game but a setting change or a setting check. For example, in the case of a pachinko machine in which the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner prior to the first special symbol as in the embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol simultaneously change during a game. Therefore, the light emitting display means (first and second special symbol display means 363 and 364) corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously turned on during setting change or setting confirmation. Thus, it can be easily recognized that the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed. Of course, the other two or more light emitting display means may notify that the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed in a light emitting mode that cannot occur during the game.

  In addition, even if it is informed that the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed, at least one light emitting display of the game information displaying means 326 is turned on / off / blinks or the like in a light emitting mode that is impossible during the game. Good. For example, when the round number notifying unit 369 does not display in a blinking state during the game, the round number notifying unit 369 may blink to notify that the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed. .

  Here, the light emission mode of the light emission display means of the game information display means 326 has been described as lighting / extinguishing / flashing. However, the lighting and flashing in this case refers to those visually recognized as such. And That is, when the game information display means 326 is controlled by the dynamic lighting method as in the embodiment, the lighting state is actually a high-speed blinking state, but this is the lighting state. The blinking state refers to a case where the lighting state (high-speed blinking) and the light-off state (light-off) are visually repeated at predetermined intervals.

  When the light emitting display means of the game information display means 326 is controlled during the game, the dynamic lighting method is used. When the light emitting display means of the game information display means 326 is controlled during setting change or setting confirmation, static lighting is performed. It is good also as a system. For example, during the game, the timer interrupt process of 4 ms is permitted to occur, so that the process repeatedly performed every 4 ms is used to make any one of the light emitting units of the light emitting display unit of the game information display unit 326 for each interrupt. It is possible to switch the common data for determining whether to transmit data relating to lighting, thereby making it easy to perform dynamic lighting control in which lighting is turned on / off repeatedly at predetermined intervals for each interrupt, while changing settings or during setting. During the confirmation, it is before the game can be played, and during this period, the generation of the 4 ms timer interrupt process is not yet permitted, so if the same process is to be executed, it is necessary to realize it. Program capacity will increase. In this regard, if the control of the game information display means 326 is made to be a static lighting method during the setting change or the setting confirmation, the lighting-related data can be transmitted to any one of the light emitting units of the game information display means 326. Since only transmission is required, the program capacity can be significantly reduced compared to the case of dynamic lighting control. As described above, the lighting control method of the game information display means 326 may be different between during the game, during the setting change, and / or during the setting confirmation.

  Further, the game information display means 326 may be provided with a light emitting display means for notifying that the setting is being changed and / or the setting is being confirmed, separately from the light emitting display means used during the game. In this case, a light emitting display means for notifying that the setting is being changed and a light emitting display means for notifying that the setting is being confirmed may be provided separately. When one type of light emitting display means (one or a plurality of light emitting units) notifies that the setting is being changed and the setting is being confirmed, the setting is being changed by making the light emission mode different between the setting changing and the setting checking. It may be possible to identify whether the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed. Conversely, by making the light emission mode the same during the setting change and during the setting check, it is possible to identify whether the setting is being changed or the setting is being checked. You may not be able to do so.

  Also, in the case where the game information display means 326 is provided with a light-emitting display means for notifying that the setting is being changed and a light-emitting display means for notifying that the setting is being confirmed, separately from the light-emitting display means used during the game. It is desirable to arrange them so that they are adjacent to each other, but they may be arranged so as to sandwich other light emitting display means.

  In addition, since the performance display means 435 is constantly operated to display the base value during the game, there is basically no control to keep the light-off state for a long time during the game. Therefore, when the game is not being played, such as when the setting is being changed or the setting is being checked, it is possible to recognize that the current state is not the game by continuing to turn off the light. It is possible to notify that it is inside. In this way, in consideration of the original display mode of the performance display unit 435, it is possible to notify that the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed by intentionally turning off the light instead of turning on the light. The same applies to the case where the setting display unit 434 and the performance display unit 435 are separately provided.

  Next, the merits of notifying the game information display unit 326 (panel lamp), the setting display unit 434, and the performance display unit 435 that the setting is being changed or the setting is being checked on the main control side will be described below. . If it is to be notified that the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed only by the liquid crystal display means 327 such as the illumination means 436 and the speaker 17 controlled by the sub side, the main control board and the sub control board will be If the signal line connecting is disconnected, it will not be possible to notify that the setting is being changed or that the setting is being checked. It becomes possible to confirm. On the other hand, in addition to (or instead of) the liquid crystal display means 327 such as the illumination means 436 and the speaker 17 controlled by the sub side, the game information display means 326 (board lamp) and the setting display means 434 controlled by the main control side, If the performance display means 435 informs that the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed, the game information display means is provided even if the signal line connecting the main control board and the sub-control board is disconnected. Since the notification is performed by the 326, the setting display means 434, and the performance display means 435, the person in the hall can notice the goto action.

  The setting is being changed using the game information display means 326 visible from the front of the gaming machine and the setting display means 434 and / or the performance display means 435 (performance information display means 433) visible from the rear of the gaming machine. And that the setting is being confirmed, it is possible to confirm the state of the setting being changed or the setting being confirmed from both the front side and the rear side of the gaming machine.

  Also, the fact that the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed is not reported on the liquid crystal display means 327 (producing means) such as the illumination means 436 and the speaker 17 which are controlled on the sub side (producing control board 416a). The game information display means 326, the setting display means 434, and the performance display means 435, which are controlled by the sub-side, may be configured to be notified, but the sub-side controls the illumination means 436, the speaker 17, etc., and the liquid crystal display means 327; For example, discrimination can be further improved by configuring the game information display unit 326, the setting display unit 434, and the performance display unit 435, which are controlled by the main control side, to notify.

  Further, the game information display means 326 is exemplified as a board lamp for notifying that the setting is being changed and / or the setting is being confirmed, but any light emitting means may be used as long as it is controlled on the main control board side. For example, it may be provided on either the board side or the frame side.

  In the embodiment, the example in which the RAM clear switch 431 is used for the setting change operation has been described. However, operation means other than the RAM clear switch 431, for example, the effect operation means 43 or the like may be used for the setting change operation. The setting change operation means 432 may have a setting change operation function in addition to the ON / OFF function related to the setting change. Further, operation means dedicated to the setting change operation may be provided.

  The setting change operation means 432 may be provided on a board different from the main control board 415a. For example, a setting change operation board may be separately provided, and the setting change operation means 432 may be provided on this.

  In the embodiment, the configuration is such that the setting value can be changed in six stages of setting 1 to 6, but the number of stages of the setting value is arbitrary, and may be 2 to 5 or 7 or more.

  When the effect control board 416a receives the setting change end command (BA77H), the end of the setting change period may be notified by the liquid crystal display means 327, the illumination means 436, the speaker 17, and the like. Further, when the effect control board 416a receives, for example, a setting confirmation end command (BA67H) or the like, the fact that the setting confirmation period has ended is notified by the liquid crystal display means 327, the illumination means 436, the speaker 17, and the like. Good.

  For example, by adding the current setting value to the lower byte of the setting change end command, setting value information may be added to the setting change end command and transmitted to the sub-control. For example, a command configuration such as BA70H (setting 1) to BA75H (setting 6) may be used, and the setting work value after the setting change may be added to the setting change end command BA70H, or the setting work value after the setting change. May be added to the setting change data, and then added to the setting change end command BA70H. In this way, by transmitting the setting change information to the sub-control with the setting change end command added to the setting change end command, for example, on the sub-control side, when the history of the setting change is left, the setting change end command The history can be stored by referring to the lower byte of. If necessary, the process for notifying the end of the setting change performed when the setting change end command is received can be notified in a notification mode according to the set value.

  During the operation confirmation display of the performance display means 435, an initial operation (initial operation) by the board movable body 371 provided on the game board 15 or the frame movable body 156 provided on the front frame 3 side may be executed. . Further, it is desirable that the initial operation of the movable body is completed before the operation confirmation display of the performance display means 435 is completed. However, only one of the movable body 371 and the frame movable body 156 is required. The initial operation may be completed during the operation confirmation display. Further, the configuration may be such that the initial operation of the movable body is executed after the operation confirmation display of the performance display unit 435 is completed. In this case, of course, the initial operation is completed after the operation confirmation display ends.

  During the operation check display of the performance display means 435, the fact that the operation check display is being performed may be notified using at least one of a lamp, a sound, and a liquid crystal on the front side of the gaming machine. Thus, the hall employee or the like can confirm from the front of the gaming machine that the performance display means 435 is performing the operation confirmation display. Even during the operation confirmation display of the performance display means 435, the variable display of the first and second special symbols and the ordinary symbols may be started.

  In the embodiment, the performance display unit 435 displays the base value as an example of the performance information (specific information). However, the performance information to be displayed is not limited to this, and the accessory ratio (the so-called electric chu (the second special In addition to the game ball / telephone and the special winning opening paid out by winning the symbol starting means 346) and the special winning opening (large winning means 347), a starting winning opening (first special symbol starting means 345), and other winnings A game ball paid out by winning a prize in the mouth) may be displayed. This makes it possible to display, on the performance display means 435, the ratio of payouts by a character such as an electric chute or a winning port in the total payout game balls. When displaying a plurality of types of performance information on the performance display means 435, for example, the base value and the accessory ratio, both the base value and the accessory ratio are switched and displayed at a predetermined timing or with a button operation. Alternatively, only the accessory ratio may be displayed. Further, a monitor for displaying the base value and a monitor for displaying the accessory ratio may be separately provided.

  Various history information related to the set values may be stored, and the history information may be displayed on a predetermined display unit, for example, a display unit (such as a liquid crystal display unit 327) controlled by the effect control board 416a. In this case, the date and time when the setting change process or the setting confirmation process was performed may be stored as history information and may be displayed. In this case, the setting value set by the setting change process and the setting value confirmed by the setting check process may be stored as history information together with the date and time of the setting change process and the setting confirmation process, and may be displayed. If the date and time of a setting change or the like cannot be acquired because, for example, an RTC (real-time clock) is not mounted, the energization elapsed time since the previous setting change is set to, for example, the setting value set by the setting change process. , May be stored together with the setting value confirmed by the setting confirmation processing, and may be displayed. In this case, each time the power is turned on, the elapsed power-on time is accumulated and counted from that point on, and when the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is executed, the accumulated count value of the energized elapsed time at that point is stored as history information. May be configured. Further, in this case, the accumulated count value of the energization elapsed time is cleared when the setting change processing is executed, and is not cleared even when the setting confirmation processing is executed. For example, even when an RTC is mounted, the elapsed time of energization from the previous setting change may be stored as history information together with or instead of the date and time of the setting change, and may be displayed. When the date and time of the setting change process and the setting confirmation process are stored as history information, for example, the elapsed time from the previous setting change or the like may be calculated based on the history information and may be displayed. Further, when specific error information has occurred, that fact may be stored as history information and displayed.

  When it is determined that the set value is an abnormal value, the date and time may be stored as history information and may be displayed. Further, when a normal set value is set after it is determined that the set value is an abnormal value, the elapsed time or the like during that time may be displayed. Also, originally, the set value is not changed during the game or the set value does not change from the normal value to the abnormal value, but if the set value is changed despite the game due to noise or goto action May store the date and time as history information and display it. Further, even when the RAM clear processing or the backup restoration processing is performed, the information may be stored as, for example, history information, and the date and time and the number of times may be displayed.

  It is desirable to display the history information during the setting confirmation processing or the setting change processing. Further, when a predetermined operation input is performed during the setting confirmation processing or the setting change processing, the history information may be displayed on the display unit. Also, even when a game is being played, history information may be displayed on the display means when a predetermined operation input is made.

  The history information as described above may be provided with an SRAM on the effect control board 416a side and stored in the SRAM. The effect control CPU of the effect control board 416a reads out the information of the SRAM when the power is turned on, saves the information in the internal work, and stores the information of the internal work in the SRAM at a predetermined timing described later. Basically, the history information is stored in the SRAM, but when the history information is updated, the value of the internal work is updated. As described above, by updating the value of the internal work at the time of updating, it is not necessary to access the SRAM every time the updating is performed, so that the frequency of accessing the SRAM can be reduced and the processing speed can be increased.

  Further, the updated information of the internal work may be stored in the SRAM at the timing when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, for example, by referring to the elapsed time stored in the internal work. Further, at the timing when a predetermined command such as a setting confirmation command, a setting confirmation end command, a setting change command, a setting change completion command, etc. is transmitted from the main control board 415a to the effect control board 416a side, the value of the internal work is changed. May be stored in the SRAM. Here, when the setting confirmation command, the fixed confirmation end command, the setting change command, and the setting change completion command are transmitted, new history information is added at that time. It is desirable to store information in the internal work and then store the information in the SRAM. At this time, the backup data may be stored in the backup area of the SRAM (hereinafter, the area storing the history information of the SRAM is used as the main area, and the backup data is stored). Area is a backup area).

  Further, a sum value may be calculated for the information of the internal work, and may be stored in the SRAM similarly. Thus, for example, when the history information of the SRAM is read out to the internal work at the timing when the power of the effect control CPU is turned on or when the history information is displayed, the sum value of the read internal work is compared with the stored sum value. By doing so, it is possible to determine whether the history information is normal. Here, if the history information read to the internal work is not normal, the history information stored for backup may be read from the SRAM to the internal work. At this time, the read sum value of the internal work may be compared with the sum value stored for backup to determine whether the data is normal. When it is determined that the backup history information is not normal, the information of the internal work may be initialized, and the initialization data may be written to the SRAM. In this case, the initialization data is written in the backup area of the SRAM. On the other hand, when it is determined that the backup history information is normal, the information of the internal work is written into the main area of the SRAM. As a result, the history information of the main area determined not to be normal can be rewritten to normal.

  The main area and the backup area of the SRAM where the history information is stored include, for example, a checksum storage area (2 bytes), a latest history position information storage area (2 bytes), an elapsed time storage area (4 bytes), and a history storage area ( (300 bytes) or the like. Here, the checksum storage area stores a sum value. The latest history position information storage area stores position information for storing the latest history information. For example, if up to 30 histories are currently stored, the next history information to be stored is the 31st history information. Therefore, the latest history position information storage area stores the position information to be stored as the information of the 31st history. are doing. Here, when the number of storable history information is 50 at the maximum, when a new history is stored next to the 50 histories, the information is overwritten on the information of the first history. Therefore, the latest history position information storage area is information indicating the first history. Note that, for example, a maximum of 50 pieces of history information are stored in the above-described history storage area. The elapsed time storage area stores the accumulated count value of the above-described energization elapsed time and the like.

  During the display of the history information, the history information may be switched by operating the operation means such as the cross operation means and the effect operation means 43 on the front side of the gaming machine. For example, when the first displayed screen is the first page, a predetermined number (for example, up to the tenth) of history information is displayed here in the form of the latest history information as the first page. You. Then, for example, by operating the left and right keys of the cross operation means, the page is switched to the second page, and the eleventh to twentieth history information is displayed. By a similar operation, for example, switching to the fifth page can be performed, thereby displaying, for example, all 50 histories. Therefore, when the page switching operation is performed, only the history information that needs to be displayed on the next page to be displayed is transmitted to the liquid crystal control CPU or transmitted to the display unit by a command. Become. The display of the first page of the history information is started when another operation means (for example, effect operation means 43) different from the page switching operation means (here, the left and right keys of the cross operation means) is operated. You may make it. Also, when any operation means (for example, the effect operation means 43) different from the page switching operation means (here, the left and right keys of the cross operation means) is operated while displaying any page, the history information is displayed. The display may be ended. During a predetermined period (during setting confirmation, setting change, etc.), display and non-display of history information may be switched each time a predetermined operation means (here, effect operation means 43) is operated.

  During the display of the history information, it is desirable that the performance display means 435 for displaying the base value is not displayed. Also, it is desirable that the operation confirmation display of the performance display unit 435 is not performed while the history information is being displayed. Further, the configuration may be such that the adjustment of the volume and / or the amount of light is effective even while the history information is being displayed. In this case, while the history information is being displayed, it is desirable that even if the adjustment of the volume and / or the light amount is effective, the display means displaying the history information does not display that the adjustment is effective. When performing, it is desirable to display at a position that does not overlap with the history information. During the display of the history information, the adjustment of the volume and / or the amount of light may not be adjusted.

  Also, it is desirable not to perform at least the initialization operation of the movable body on the board side during the display of the history information. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the movable body on the board side from being moved to the front side of the display means (the liquid crystal display means 327), thereby hindering the visibility of the display screen. Similarly, the initialization operation may not be performed for the movable body on the frame side. However, the movable body on the frame side may be initialized when there is no possibility that the display screen of the liquid crystal display means 327 or the like is obstructed. In this case, for example, the initialization operation may also be performed on the vibration means 252 mounted on the operation means such as the operation handle 234, the air blowing means 233 for blowing out air, and the like. Thus, the initialization operation of the movable body on the frame side can be terminated first, so that after the display of the history information is completed, that is, after the setting confirmation processing or the setting change processing is completed, the movable body on the panel side is terminated. It is efficient because only initialization is required. The present invention is not limited to this, and the initialization operation may be performed on all the movable bodies after the display of the history information is completed.

  In the embodiment, only one out-ball detecting means 414 is provided, but a plurality of out-ball detecting means 414 may be provided. In this case, the outlet 412 may be provided for each of the plurality of out-ball detecting units 414, or the plurality of out-ball detecting units 414 may be provided for one outlet 412. As a result, the discharge efficiency of the game balls is increased, and the risk that the game balls are congested around the discharge port 412 and the ball is clogged can be reduced. When a plurality of out-ball detecting means 414 is provided in one outlet 412, it is desirable to arrange at least two of them out on the left and right. This makes it possible to easily detect a game ball flowing down from the left inclined surface 461 (FIGS. 110 and 111), and to detect a game ball flowing down from the right inclined surface 463 (FIGS. 110 and 111). The role can be assigned to the out-of-ball detecting means 414 which is easy to perform, and the discharge efficiency is further increased, so that the risk of clogging of the ball can be reduced.

  Further, in order to allow the game balls to flow down to the outlet 412 more efficiently, a guide rib for guiding the game balls to the outlet 412 may be provided on an inclined surface around the outlet 412. A plurality of the guide ribs may be provided. For example, the guide ribs arranged on the left inclined surface 461 side and the guide ribs arranged on the right inclined surface 463 side may be asymmetric (for example, have different lengths). . Further, one guide rib may guide the game ball to the back side of the outlet 412, and the other guide rib may guide the game ball to the front side of the outlet 412. By differentiating the configuration of the guide rib between the left and right of the outlet 412 in this manner, the game ball flowing down from the left inclined surface 461 and the game ball flowing down from the right inclined surface 463 are supplied to the outlet 412. The arrival timing can be made different, and the risk of clogging the ball around the outlet 412 can be reduced.

  In the case where the plurality of outlets 412 are provided and the out-ball detecting means 414 is arranged, the guide ribs arranged on the left inclined surface 461 side and the guide ribs arranged on the right inclined surface 463 are different from each other. A configuration for guiding the game ball toward 412 may be adopted. The guide rib arranged on the left inclined surface 461 side is directed to the left (or right) discharge port 412, and the guide rib disposed on the right inclined surface 463 is directed to the right (or left) discharge port 412. You may comprise so that each may guide a game ball. As described above, by adopting a configuration in which the game balls are guided to the different outlets 412 by the plurality of guide ribs, the risk of ball clogging around the outlets 412 can be reduced.

  In the configuration as shown in FIGS. 110 and 111, when the left and right inclined surfaces 461, 462 and the right inclined surfaces 463, 464 have different inclination angles in the left-right direction, a winning detection switch and an inclination on the side with a large number of out ports are provided. The inclination angle of the surface may be larger than the inclination angle of the inclined surface on the smaller side. Also, a prize winning means such as a so-called attacker (large prize winning means 347) or an electric chew (second special symbol starting means 346) on which a large number of game balls are likely to win temporarily is arranged (in the present embodiment, there is a prize winning means). Regarding the inclined surface on the right side), the inclination angle of the inclined surface on the opposite side (the left side in the present embodiment) is made larger to increase the flow speed of the game ball and reduce the risk of ball clogging. Good.

  In order to make it easier for the game ball that has entered the out port 358 to be guided to the outlet 412, an inclined surface that is inclined from the out port 358 toward the outlet 412 may be provided. The inclined surface may have a different inclination angle from the right inclined surface and / or the left inclined surface of the discharge port 412, or may have the same inclination angle.

  With respect to the discharge port 412, the out-ball detecting means 414, and the inclined surface for guiding the game ball to the discharge port 412 side, at least a part thereof may be arranged on the front frame 3 side instead of the game board 15 side.

  The out-sphere detection means 414 may be arranged so as to be shifted to one side in the left-right direction with respect to the specific reference position. The specific reference position in this case may be the center of the game board 15 in the left-right direction (of the base plate 321), the center of the game area 15a in the left-right direction, or the leftmost prize detection switch and the rightmost prize detection switch. May be at the center in the left-right direction. Of course, the out ball detection means 414 may be arranged on the game board 15 side or on the front frame 3 side.

  In addition, the one side in the left-right direction with respect to the specific reference position may be a side that takes a long time to discharge game balls. The side that takes a long time to discharge the game ball is a winning detection switch that takes the longest time for the winning ball to reach the out ball detecting means 414 when the out ball detecting means 414 is arranged at the specific reference position. May be a side having a smaller inclination angle, or may be a side having a smaller inclination angle of an inclined surface around the out-sphere detection means 414. Further, the winning detection switch may be disposed on a side where a larger number of winning detection switches are disposed (it takes time to discharge due to collision of game balls or the like), or the side on which the winning detection switch is disposed at a higher position. Is also good. Further, one side in the left-right direction with respect to the specific reference position is a side with a chance of winning, a side with a relatively large number of winning opportunities (for example, a winning detection switch 347a of the large winning means 347 where many balls win during a big hit, or a large number during a time saving / probable change). (The side where the winning detection switch 346a of the electric chew (the second special symbol starting means 346) is located) where the ball wins.

  When a plurality of out-ball detecting means 414 are arranged, the center position of the plurality of out-ball detecting means 414 may be shifted to one side in the left-right direction with respect to the specific reference position, or the plurality of out-ball detecting means 414 may be shifted. May be shifted to one side in the left-right direction with respect to the specific reference position. Further, any one of the plurality of out-ball detecting means 414 may be shifted to one side in the left-right direction with respect to the specific reference position.

  When an out port (second out port) is provided in the normal winning unit 325, the game ball passing through the second out port passes through, for example, a guide gutter (not shown) and lands on the inclined surface 462 (FIG. 110). The time until the game ball passing through the prize detection switches 349a and 350a may pass through, for example, a guide gutter and land on the inclined surface 462. In this case, by making the latter shorter than the former, it is possible to reduce the lag of the detection timing of the game ball due to the state change, and it is possible to make the timing at which the game ball flows down to the discharge port 412 different, so that the discharge is performed. Ball clogging near the outlet 412 can be reduced. Similarly, when an out port (third out port) is provided in the vicinity of the special winning means 347, the game ball passing through the third out port passes through, for example, a guide gutter (not shown) and has an inclined surface 464. (FIG. 110), the time until the game ball passing through the prize detection switches 347a and 348a passes through, for example, a guide gutter and lands on the inclined surface 464 may be different. In this case, the latter may be shorter than the former. Also, in order to vary the time from winning to landing on the inclined surface, the flow length of each guide gutter provided on the rear side of the winning means is different, or the inclined surface which is the landing surface from the outlet of each guide gutter. May be different.

  All of the embodiments and modifications described above may be combined in any way, and the contents described as each embodiment and modification are not limited to the individual embodiments and modifications. For example, each of the second and third embodiments is a modification of the first embodiment, but the third embodiment can be applied to the second embodiment. Further, the fourth embodiment is applicable to all of the first to third embodiments and combinations thereof. Further, the fifth embodiment is applicable to all of the first to fourth embodiments and combinations thereof. Further, the modifications and other various items described after the embodiment are also applicable to the first to fifth embodiments and their combinations.

  Further, the present invention can be similarly applied to a game machine other than a ball game machine such as a slot machine, in addition to various ball game machines such as an arrangement ball machine and a sparrow ball game machine.

15a game area 16 firing means 75 lower plate guide passage (return passage)
82 rotation operation unit (first operation means)
83 return spring (biasing means)
92 Operation lever (second operation means)

Claims (2)

Launching means for launching game balls toward the game area;
A return path for returning the game ball when the game ball fired by the firing means has not reached the game area,
First operation means that can be changed between a non-operation position and an operation upper limit position by an external operation;
Urging means for urging the first operating means toward the non-operating position;
A second operation means capable of performing a first operation from outside,
The launching means performs a launching operation of the game ball at a firing intensity according to a displacement amount from the non-operation position in the first operation means, and a game ball fired in a state where the displacement amount is equal to or less than a specific threshold value. A game ball fired in a state in which the displacement amount exceeds the specific threshold without reaching the game area reaches the game area,
In a gaming machine configured to not execute a firing operation by the firing means when the first operation is performed on the second operating means,
When a second operation different from the first operation is performed on the second operation unit when the first operation unit is at the non-operation position, the first operation is performed along with the second operation. The means is configured to be displaced to the operation upper limit position side and the amount of displacement is equal to or less than the specific threshold value,
A gaming machine, wherein the first operation means is held without returning to the non-operation position while the second operation is being performed on the second operation means. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein in the state where the first operation means is in the non-operation position, the first operation on the second operation means is prohibited, and the second operation is permitted. .